xref: /openbmc/linux/include/net/mac80211.h (revision b8265621)
1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
2 /*
3  * mac80211 <-> driver interface
4  *
5  * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
6  * Copyright 2006-2007	Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
7  * Copyright 2007-2010	Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
8  * Copyright 2013-2014  Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
9  * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
10  * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2020 Intel Corporation
11  */
12 
13 #ifndef MAC80211_H
14 #define MAC80211_H
15 
16 #include <linux/bug.h>
17 #include <linux/kernel.h>
18 #include <linux/if_ether.h>
19 #include <linux/skbuff.h>
20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h>
21 #include <net/cfg80211.h>
22 #include <net/codel.h>
23 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
24 #include <asm/unaligned.h>
25 
26 /**
27  * DOC: Introduction
28  *
29  * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
30  * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
31  * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
32  * drivers.
33  */
34 
35 /**
36  * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
37  *
38  * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
39  * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
40  * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
41  * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
42  * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
43  * tasklet function.
44  *
45  * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
46  *	 use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
47  */
48 
49 /**
50  * DOC: Warning
51  *
52  * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
53  * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
54  */
55 
56 /**
57  * DOC: Frame format
58  *
59  * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
60  * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
61  * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
62  * hardware.
63  *
64  * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
65  *
66  * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
67  * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
68  *
69  * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
70  * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
71  */
72 
73 /**
74  * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
75  *
76  * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
77  * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
78  * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
79  * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
80  *
81  * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
82  * suspend.
83  *
84  * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
85  *
86  */
87 
88 /**
89  * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
90  *
91  * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
92  * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
93  * between different stations/interfaces.
94  * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
95  * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
96  * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
97  *
98  * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
99  * driver operation.
100  *
101  * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
102  * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
103  * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
104  *
105  * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
106  * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
107  *
108  * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
109  * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
110  * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
111  *
112  * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
113  * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
114  * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
115  * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
116  * ieee80211_return_txq().
117  *
118  * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
119  * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
120  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
121  * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
122  * .release_buffered_frames().
123  * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
124  * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
125  * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
126  */
127 
128 struct device;
129 
130 /**
131  * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
132  *
133  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
134  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
135  */
136 enum ieee80211_max_queues {
137 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES =		16,
138 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP =	BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
139 };
140 
141 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE	0xff
142 
143 /**
144  * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
145  * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
146  * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
147  * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
148  * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
149  */
150 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
151 	IEEE80211_AC_VO		= 0,
152 	IEEE80211_AC_VI		= 1,
153 	IEEE80211_AC_BE		= 2,
154 	IEEE80211_AC_BK		= 3,
155 };
156 
157 /**
158  * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
159  *
160  * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
161  * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
162  *
163  * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
164  * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
165  *	2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
166  * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
167  * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
168  * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
169  * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
170  * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
171  * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
172  */
173 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
174 	u16 txop;
175 	u16 cw_min;
176 	u16 cw_max;
177 	u8 aifs;
178 	bool acm;
179 	bool uapsd;
180 	bool mu_edca;
181 	struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
182 };
183 
184 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
185 	unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
186 	unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
187 	unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
188 	unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
189 };
190 
191 /**
192  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
193  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
194  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
195  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
196  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
197  *	this is used only with channel switching with CSA
198  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
199  */
200 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
201 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH		= BIT(0),
202 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS	= BIT(1),
203 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR		= BIT(2),
204 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL	= BIT(3),
205 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH	= BIT(4),
206 };
207 
208 /**
209  * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
210  *
211  * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
212  * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
213  *
214  * @def: the channel definition
215  * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
216  * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
217  *	active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
218  * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
219  *	after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
220  *	this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
221  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
222  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
223  *	sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
224  */
225 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
226 	struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
227 	struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
228 
229 	u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
230 
231 	bool radar_enabled;
232 
233 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
234 };
235 
236 /**
237  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
238  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
239  *	exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
240  *	needs to be switched from one to the other.
241  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
242  *      to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
243  *      will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
244  *      from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
245  *      implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
246  *      hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
247  *      will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
248  *      for changes/removal.)
249  */
250 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
251 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
252 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
253 };
254 
255 /**
256  * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
257  *
258  * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
259  * needs to switch from one chanctx to another.  The
260  * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
261  * done.
262  *
263  * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
264  * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
265  * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
266  */
267 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
268 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
269 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
270 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
271 };
272 
273 /**
274  * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
275  *
276  * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
277  * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
278  *
279  * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
280  *	also implies a change in the AID.
281  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
282  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
283  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
284  * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
285  * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
286  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
287  * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
288  *	reason (IBSS and managed mode)
289  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
290  *	new beacon (beaconing modes)
291  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
292  *	enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
293  * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
294  * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
295  * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
296  * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
297  *	that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
298  * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
299  * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
300  * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
301  * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
302  * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
303  * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
304  *	changed
305  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
306  *	currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
307  * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
308  *	note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
309  *	context had been assigned.
310  * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
311  * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
312  * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
313  *	keep alive) changed.
314  * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
315  * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder
316  *	functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
317  * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
318  * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
319  * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed
320  *
321  */
322 enum ieee80211_bss_change {
323 	BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC		= 1<<0,
324 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT	= 1<<1,
325 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE	= 1<<2,
326 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT		= 1<<3,
327 	BSS_CHANGED_HT			= 1<<4,
328 	BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES		= 1<<5,
329 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT		= 1<<6,
330 	BSS_CHANGED_BSSID		= 1<<7,
331 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON		= 1<<8,
332 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED	= 1<<9,
333 	BSS_CHANGED_CQM			= 1<<10,
334 	BSS_CHANGED_IBSS		= 1<<11,
335 	BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER		= 1<<12,
336 	BSS_CHANGED_QOS			= 1<<13,
337 	BSS_CHANGED_IDLE		= 1<<14,
338 	BSS_CHANGED_SSID		= 1<<15,
339 	BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP	= 1<<16,
340 	BSS_CHANGED_PS			= 1<<17,
341 	BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER		= 1<<18,
342 	BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS		= 1<<19,
343 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO		= 1<<20,
344 	BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH		= 1<<21,
345 	BSS_CHANGED_OCB                 = 1<<22,
346 	BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS		= 1<<23,
347 	BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE		= 1<<24,
348 	BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE		= 1<<25,
349 	BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER	= 1<<26,
350 	BSS_CHANGED_TWT			= 1<<27,
351 	BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD		= 1<<28,
352 	BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR	= 1<<29,
353 
354 	/* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
355 };
356 
357 /*
358  * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
359  * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
360  * filtering will be disabled.
361  */
362 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
363 
364 /**
365  * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
366  * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
367  * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
368  * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
369  * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
370  *	they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
371  *	once each time the timeout triggers.
372  */
373 enum ieee80211_event_type {
374 	RSSI_EVENT,
375 	MLME_EVENT,
376 	BAR_RX_EVENT,
377 	BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
378 };
379 
380 /**
381  * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
382  * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
383  * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
384  */
385 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
386 	RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
387 	RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
388 };
389 
390 /**
391  * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
392  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
393  */
394 struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
395 	enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
396 };
397 
398 /**
399  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
400  * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
401  * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
402  * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
403  * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
404  */
405 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
406 	AUTH_EVENT,
407 	ASSOC_EVENT,
408 	DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
409 	DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
410 };
411 
412 /**
413  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
414  * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
415  * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
416  * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
417  */
418 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
419 	MLME_SUCCESS,
420 	MLME_DENIED,
421 	MLME_TIMEOUT,
422 };
423 
424 /**
425  * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
426  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
427  * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
428  * @reason: the reason code if applicable
429  */
430 struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
431 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
432 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
433 	u16 reason;
434 };
435 
436 /**
437  * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
438  * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
439  * @tid: the tid
440  * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
441  */
442 struct ieee80211_ba_event {
443 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
444 	u16 tid;
445 	u16 ssn;
446 };
447 
448 /**
449  * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
450  * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
451  * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
452  * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
453  * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
454  * @u:union holding the fields above
455  */
456 struct ieee80211_event {
457 	enum ieee80211_event_type type;
458 	union {
459 		struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
460 		struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
461 		struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
462 	} u;
463 };
464 
465 /**
466  * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
467  *
468  * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
469  *
470  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
471  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
472  */
473 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
474 	u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
475 	u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
476 };
477 
478 /**
479  * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
480  *
481  * @lci: LCI subelement content
482  * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
483  * @lci_len: LCI data length
484  * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
485  */
486 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
487 	const u8 *lci;
488 	const u8 *civicloc;
489 	size_t lci_len;
490 	size_t civicloc_len;
491 };
492 
493 /**
494  * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
495  *
496  * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
497  * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
498  *
499  * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
500  * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK
501  * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
502  * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
503  *	ACK, BACK or both
504  * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
505  * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
506  * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
507  * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
508  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
509  * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
510  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
511  * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames
512  * @assoc: association status
513  * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
514  *	or not
515  * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
516  * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
517  * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
518  * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
519  * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
520  * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
521  *	valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
522  *	with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
523  * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
524  *	as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
525  *	HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
526  *	only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
527  *	association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
528  *	%BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
529  * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
530  *	the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
531  *	(see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
532  * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
533  *	is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
534  *	IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
535  *	by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
536  *	guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
537  * @beacon_int: beacon interval
538  * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
539  * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
540  *	index into the rate table configured by the driver in
541  *	the current band.
542  * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
543  * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
544  * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
545  * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
546  * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
547  *	configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
548  * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
549  * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
550  *	This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
551  *	Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
552  *	be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
553  * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
554  *	implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
555  *	cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
556  *	relation to the newly configured threshold.
557  * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
558  *	implies disabled.  This is an alternative mechanism to the single
559  *	threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
560  * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
561  * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
562  * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
563  *	may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
564  *	The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
565  *	to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
566  * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
567  *	may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
568  *	array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
569  * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
570  * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
571  *	hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
572  *	your driver/device needs to do.
573  * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
574  *	offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
575  * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
576  * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
577  * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
578  * @txpower: TX power in dBm.  INT_MIN means not configured.
579  * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
580  *	Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
581  *	TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
582  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
583  *	userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
584  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
585  * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
586  * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
587  *	to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
588  *	if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
589  * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
590  *	transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
591  *	In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
592  *	a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
593  * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
594  *	protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
595  *	station.
596  * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
597  *	responder functionality.
598  * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
599  * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
600  * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
601  * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
602  * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
603  * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
604  *	nontransmitted BSSIDs
605  * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
606  *	in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
607  * @he_oper: HE operation information of the AP we are connected to
608  * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
609  * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE
610  */
611 struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
612 	const u8 *bssid;
613 	u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
614 	bool multi_sta_back_32bit;
615 	bool uora_exists;
616 	bool ack_enabled;
617 	u8 uora_ocw_range;
618 	u16 frame_time_rts_th;
619 	bool he_support;
620 	bool twt_requester;
621 	bool twt_responder;
622 	bool twt_protected;
623 	/* association related data */
624 	bool assoc, ibss_joined;
625 	bool ibss_creator;
626 	u16 aid;
627 	/* erp related data */
628 	bool use_cts_prot;
629 	bool use_short_preamble;
630 	bool use_short_slot;
631 	bool enable_beacon;
632 	u8 dtim_period;
633 	u16 beacon_int;
634 	u16 assoc_capability;
635 	u64 sync_tsf;
636 	u32 sync_device_ts;
637 	u8 sync_dtim_count;
638 	u32 basic_rates;
639 	struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
640 	int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
641 	u16 ht_operation_mode;
642 	s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
643 	u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
644 	s32 cqm_rssi_low;
645 	s32 cqm_rssi_high;
646 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
647 	struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
648 	__be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
649 	int arp_addr_cnt;
650 	bool qos;
651 	bool idle;
652 	bool ps;
653 	u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
654 	size_t ssid_len;
655 	bool hidden_ssid;
656 	int txpower;
657 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
658 	struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
659 	bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
660 	u16 max_idle_period;
661 	bool protected_keep_alive;
662 	bool ftm_responder;
663 	struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
664 	/* Multiple BSSID data */
665 	bool nontransmitted;
666 	u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
667 	u8 bssid_index;
668 	u8 bssid_indicator;
669 	bool ema_ap;
670 	u8 profile_periodicity;
671 	struct {
672 		u32 params;
673 		u16 nss_set;
674 	} he_oper;
675 	struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
676 	struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color;
677 };
678 
679 /**
680  * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
681  *
682  * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
683  *
684  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
685  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
686  *	number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
687  *	number and increasing the sequence number only when the
688  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
689  *	assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
690  *	for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
691  *	that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
692  *	If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
693  *	assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
694  *	802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
695  *	beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
696  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
697  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
698  *	station
699  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
700  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
701  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
702  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
703  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
704  *	because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
705  *	avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
706  *	firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
707  *	went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
708  *	the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
709  *	that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
710  *	since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
711  *	hardware queue.
712  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
713  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
714  * 	is for the whole aggregation.
715  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
716  * 	so consider using block ack request (BAR).
717  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
718  *	set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
719  *	be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
720  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
721  *	that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
722  *	off-channel operation.
723  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
724  *	used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
725  *	it can be sent out.
726  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
727  *	used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
728  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
729  *	used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
730  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
731  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
732  *	be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
733  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
734  *	transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
735  *	by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
736  *	queue gets full.
737  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
738  *	after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
739  *	be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
740  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
741  *	code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
742  *	should kick the MLME state machine.
743  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
744  *	MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
745  *	status to user space)
746  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
747  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
748  *	frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
749  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
750  *	the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
751  *	in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
752  *	handled properly by the device.
753  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
754  *	testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
755  *	TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
756  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
757  *	This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
758  *	frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
759  * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
760  *	when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
761  *	an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
762  *	the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
763  *	PS-Poll responses.
764  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
765  *	This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
766  *	the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
767  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
768  *	would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
769  *	monitor injection).
770  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
771  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
772  *	any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
773  *	This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
774  *	behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
775  *
776  * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
777  *	 forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
778  */
779 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
780 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS		= BIT(0),
781 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ		= BIT(1),
782 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK			= BIT(2),
783 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT		= BIT(3),
784 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT		= BIT(4),
785 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM	= BIT(5),
786 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU			= BIT(6),
787 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED		= BIT(7),
788 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED		= BIT(8),
789 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK			= BIT(9),
790 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU			= BIT(10),
791 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK		= BIT(11),
792 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE	= BIT(12),
793 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK	= BIT(13),
794 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING	= BIT(14),
795 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED		= BIT(15),
796 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT		= BIT(16),
797 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER		= BIT(17),
798 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES		= BIT(18),
799 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION	= BIT(19),
800 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX		= BIT(20),
801 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX	= BIT(21),
802 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC			= BIT(22),
803 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC			= BIT(23) | BIT(24),
804 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN		= BIT(25),
805 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE	= BIT(26),
806 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE		= BIT(27),
807 	IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP		= BIT(28),
808 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE		= BIT(29),
809 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG		= BIT(30),
810 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED	= BIT(31),
811 };
812 
813 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT		23
814 
815 /**
816  * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
817  *
818  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
819  *	protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
820  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
821  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
822  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
823  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
824  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
825  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
826  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation
827  *	(header conversion)
828  *
829  * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
830  */
831 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
832 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO	= BIT(0),
833 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE		= BIT(1),
834 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT		= BIT(2),
835 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU			= BIT(3),
836 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT		= BIT(4),
837 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP	= BIT(5),
838 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_HW_80211_ENCAP	= BIT(6),
839 };
840 
841 /*
842  * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
843  * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
844  */
845 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK |		      \
846 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT |    \
847 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU |	      \
848 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED |	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK |		      \
849 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK |	      \
850 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER |    \
851 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC |		      \
852 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
853 
854 /**
855  * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
856  *	Rate Control algorithm.
857  *
858  * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
859  * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
860  *
861  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
862  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
863  *	This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
864  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
865  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
866  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
867  *	into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
868  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
869  *	Greenfield mode.
870  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
871  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
872  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
873  *	(80+80 isn't supported yet)
874  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
875  *	adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
876  *	NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
877  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
878  */
879 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
880 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS		= BIT(0),
881 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT		= BIT(1),
882 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE	= BIT(2),
883 
884 	/* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
885 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS			= BIT(3),
886 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD		= BIT(4),
887 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(5),
888 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA		= BIT(6),
889 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI		= BIT(7),
890 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS			= BIT(8),
891 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(9),
892 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(10),
893 };
894 
895 
896 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
897 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
898 
899 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
900 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
901 
902 /* maximum number of rate stages */
903 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES	4
904 
905 /* maximum number of rate table entries */
906 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE	4
907 
908 /**
909  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
910  *
911  * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
912  * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
913  * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
914  *
915  * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
916  * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
917  *
918  * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
919  * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
920  *
921  * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
922  * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
923  * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
924  * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
925  * information::
926  *
927  *    { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
928  *
929  * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
930  * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
931  * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
932  * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
933  * information should then contain::
934  *
935  *   { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
936  *
937  * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
938  * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
939  */
940 struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
941 	s8 idx;
942 	u16 count:5,
943 	    flags:11;
944 } __packed;
945 
946 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY		31
947 
948 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
949 					  u8 mcs, u8 nss)
950 {
951 	WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
952 	WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
953 	rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
954 }
955 
956 static inline u8
957 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
958 {
959 	return rate->idx & 0xF;
960 }
961 
962 static inline u8
963 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
964 {
965 	return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
966 }
967 
968 /**
969  * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
970  *
971  * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
972  *  (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
973  *  (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
974  *  (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
975  *
976  * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
977  * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
978  * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
979  * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
980  * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally
981  * @control: union part for control data
982  * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
983  * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
984  * @control.use_rts: use RTS
985  * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
986  * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
987  * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
988  * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
989  * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
990  * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
991  * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
992  * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
993  * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
994  * @pad: padding
995  * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
996  * @status: union part for status data
997  * @status.rates: attempted rates
998  * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
999  * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
1000  * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
1001  * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
1002  * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission
1003  * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid
1004  * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
1005  * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
1006  * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
1007  * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
1008  * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
1009  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1010  * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
1011  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1012  * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
1013  */
1014 struct ieee80211_tx_info {
1015 	/* common information */
1016 	u32 flags;
1017 	u32 band:3,
1018 	    ack_frame_id:13,
1019 	    hw_queue:4,
1020 	    tx_time_est:10;
1021 	/* 2 free bits */
1022 
1023 	union {
1024 		struct {
1025 			union {
1026 				/* rate control */
1027 				struct {
1028 					struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1029 						IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1030 					s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1031 					u8 use_rts:1;
1032 					u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1033 					u8 short_preamble:1;
1034 					u8 skip_table:1;
1035 					/* 2 bytes free */
1036 				};
1037 				/* only needed before rate control */
1038 				unsigned long jiffies;
1039 			};
1040 			/* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1041 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1042 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1043 			u32 flags;
1044 			codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1045 		} control;
1046 		struct {
1047 			u64 cookie;
1048 		} ack;
1049 		struct {
1050 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1051 			s32 ack_signal;
1052 			u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1053 			u8 ampdu_len;
1054 			u8 antenna;
1055 			u16 tx_time;
1056 			bool is_valid_ack_signal;
1057 			void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
1058 		} status;
1059 		struct {
1060 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1061 				IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1062 			u8 pad[4];
1063 
1064 			void *rate_driver_data[
1065 				IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1066 		};
1067 		void *driver_data[
1068 			IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1069 	};
1070 };
1071 
1072 static inline u16
1073 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est)
1074 {
1075 	/* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime
1076 	 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1
1077 	 */
1078 	info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2;
1079 	return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1080 }
1081 
1082 static inline u16
1083 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1084 {
1085 	return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1086 }
1087 
1088 /**
1089  * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control
1090  *
1091  * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1092  * @info: Basic tx status information
1093  * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1094  * @rate: The TX rate that was used when sending the packet
1095  */
1096 struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1097 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1098 	struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1099 	struct sk_buff *skb;
1100 	struct rate_info *rate;
1101 };
1102 
1103 /**
1104  * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1105  *
1106  * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1107  * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1108  * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1109  *
1110  * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1111  * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1112  * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1113  * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1114  */
1115 struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1116 	const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1117 	size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1118 	const u8 *common_ies;
1119 	size_t common_ie_len;
1120 };
1121 
1122 
1123 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1124 {
1125 	return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1126 }
1127 
1128 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1129 {
1130 	return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1131 }
1132 
1133 /**
1134  * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1135  *
1136  * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1137  *
1138  * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1139  * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1140  * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1141  * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1142  *
1143  * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1144  *	 info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1145  *	 instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1146  */
1147 static inline void
1148 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1149 {
1150 	int i;
1151 
1152 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1153 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1154 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1155 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1156 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1157 	/* clear the rate counts */
1158 	for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1159 		info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1160 
1161 	BUILD_BUG_ON(
1162 	    offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
1163 	memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1164 	       sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1165 	       offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1166 }
1167 
1168 
1169 /**
1170  * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1171  *
1172  * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1173  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1174  *	Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1175  * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1176  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1177  *	verification has been done by the hardware.
1178  * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1179  *	If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1180  *	hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1181  * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1182  *	flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1183  *	Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1184  *	is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1185  * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1186  *	de-duplication by itself.
1187  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1188  *	the frame.
1189  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1190  *	the frame.
1191  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1192  *	field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1193  *	was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1194  *	merging.
1195  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1196  *	field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1197  *	(including FCS) was received.
1198  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1199  *	field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1200  * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1201  *	Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1202  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1203  *	number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1204  *	each A-MPDU
1205  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1206  *	subframes of a single A-MPDU
1207  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1208  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1209  *	on this subframe
1210  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1211  *	is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1212  * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1213  *	done by the hardware
1214  * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1215  *	processing it in any regular way.
1216  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1217  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1218  * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1219  *	monitor interfaces.
1220  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1221  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1222  * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1223  *	subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1224  *	All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1225  *	if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1226  *	the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1227  *	deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1228  *	subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1229  *	either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1230  *	interleaved with other frames.
1231  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1232  *	radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1233  *	the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1234  * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1235  *	This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1236  *	the first subframe.
1237  * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1238  *	be done in the hardware.
1239  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1240  *	frame
1241  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1242  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1243  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1244  *
1245  *	 - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1246  *	 - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1247  *	 - DATA3_CODING
1248  *	 - DATA5_GI
1249  *	 - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1250  *	 - DATA6_NSTS
1251  *	 - DATA3_STBC
1252  *
1253  *	from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1254  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1255  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1256  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1257  * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1258  *	the "0-length PSDU" field included there.  The value for it is
1259  *	in &struct ieee80211_rx_status.  Note that if this value isn't
1260  *	known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1261  */
1262 enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1263 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR		= BIT(0),
1264 	RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED		= BIT(1),
1265 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START	= BIT(2),
1266 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(3),
1267 	RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED		= BIT(4),
1268 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC		= BIT(5),
1269 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC 	= BIT(6),
1270 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START		= BIT(7),
1271 	RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL		= BIT(8),
1272 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS		= BIT(9),
1273 	RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED		= BIT(10),
1274 	RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED		= BIT(11),
1275 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN	= BIT(12),
1276 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST		= BIT(13),
1277 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR	= BIT(14),
1278 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN	= BIT(15),
1279 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END		= BIT(16),
1280 	RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR		= BIT(17),
1281 	RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR		= BIT(18),
1282 	RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE		= BIT(19),
1283 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA	= BIT(20),
1284 	RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(21),
1285 	RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN		= BIT(22),
1286 	RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED		= BIT(23),
1287 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT		= BIT(24),
1288 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN	= BIT(25),
1289 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE		= BIT(26),
1290 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU		= BIT(27),
1291 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG		= BIT(28),
1292 	RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU			= BIT(29),
1293 };
1294 
1295 /**
1296  * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1297  *
1298  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1299  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1300  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1301  *	if the driver fills this value it should add
1302  *	%IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1303  *	to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1304  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1305  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1306  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1307  */
1308 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1309 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE		= BIT(0),
1310 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI		= BIT(2),
1311 	RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF		= BIT(3),
1312 	RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK		= BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1313 	RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC		= BIT(6),
1314 	RX_ENC_FLAG_BF			= BIT(7),
1315 };
1316 
1317 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT		4
1318 
1319 enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1320 	RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1321 	RX_ENC_HT,
1322 	RX_ENC_VHT,
1323 	RX_ENC_HE,
1324 };
1325 
1326 /**
1327  * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1328  *
1329  * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1330  * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1331  * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1332  *
1333  * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1334  * 	(TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1335  * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1336  *	needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1337  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1338  *	it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1339  * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1340  * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1341  *	This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1342  *	for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1343  * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz.
1344  * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1345  *	unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1346  *	@IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1347  * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1348  *	values were filled.
1349  * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1350  *	support dB or unspecified units)
1351  * @antenna: antenna used
1352  * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1353  *	HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1354  * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1355  * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1356  * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1357  * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1358  * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1359  * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1360  * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1361  * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1362  * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1363  * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1364  *	each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1365  * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1366  * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1367  */
1368 struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1369 	u64 mactime;
1370 	u64 boottime_ns;
1371 	u32 device_timestamp;
1372 	u32 ampdu_reference;
1373 	u32 flag;
1374 	u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1;
1375 	u8 enc_flags;
1376 	u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1377 	u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1378 	u8 rate_idx;
1379 	u8 nss;
1380 	u8 rx_flags;
1381 	u8 band;
1382 	u8 antenna;
1383 	s8 signal;
1384 	u8 chains;
1385 	s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1386 	u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1387 	u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1388 };
1389 
1390 static inline u32
1391 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status)
1392 {
1393 	return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) +
1394 	       (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0);
1395 }
1396 
1397 /**
1398  * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1399  * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1400  *	(this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1401  *	 bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1402  * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1403  *	alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1404  *	description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1405  *	Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1406  * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1407  * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1408  * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1409  *	then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1410  *	@data field.
1411  * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1412  *	the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1413  *	length
1414  * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1415  *
1416  * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1417  * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1418  * data.
1419  */
1420 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1421 	u32 present;
1422 	u8 align;
1423 	u8 oui[3];
1424 	u8 subns;
1425 	u8 pad;
1426 	u16 len;
1427 	u8 data[];
1428 } __packed;
1429 
1430 /**
1431  * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1432  *
1433  * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1434  *
1435  * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1436  *	to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1437  *	or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1438  * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1439  *	This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1440  *	meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1441  *	transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1442  *	Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1443  *	driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1444  *	for more.
1445  * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1446  *	the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1447  *	may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1448  *	be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1449  *	it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1450  * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1451  *	operating channel.
1452  */
1453 enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1454 	IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR		= (1<<0),
1455 	IEEE80211_CONF_PS		= (1<<1),
1456 	IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE		= (1<<2),
1457 	IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL	= (1<<3),
1458 };
1459 
1460 
1461 /**
1462  * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1463  *
1464  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1465  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1466  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1467  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1468  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1469  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1470  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1471  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1472  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1473  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1474  */
1475 enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1476 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS		= BIT(1),
1477 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL	= BIT(2),
1478 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR		= BIT(3),
1479 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS		= BIT(4),
1480 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER		= BIT(5),
1481 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL		= BIT(6),
1482 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS	= BIT(7),
1483 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE		= BIT(8),
1484 };
1485 
1486 /**
1487  * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1488  *
1489  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1490  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1491  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1492  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1493  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1494  */
1495 enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1496 	IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1497 	IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1498 	IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1499 	IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1500 
1501 	/* keep last */
1502 	IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1503 };
1504 
1505 /**
1506  * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1507  *
1508  * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1509  *
1510  * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1511  *
1512  * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1513  * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1514  *	in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1515  *	has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1516  * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1517  *	powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1518  *	the CONF_PS flag is set.
1519  *
1520  * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1521  *	value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1522  *
1523  * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1524  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1525  *
1526  * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1527  *	(a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1528  *	but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1529  * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1530  *	frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1531  *	number of transmissions not the number of retries
1532  *
1533  * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1534  *	%IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1535  *	configured for an HT channel.
1536  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1537  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1538  */
1539 struct ieee80211_conf {
1540 	u32 flags;
1541 	int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1542 
1543 	u16 listen_interval;
1544 	u8 ps_dtim_period;
1545 
1546 	u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1547 
1548 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1549 	bool radar_enabled;
1550 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1551 };
1552 
1553 /**
1554  * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1555  *
1556  * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1557  * operation.
1558  *
1559  * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1560  *	Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1561  *	announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1562  *	the driver passed into mac80211.
1563  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1564  *	rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1565  * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1566  *	scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1567  * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1568  * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1569  * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1570   *	current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1571   *	channel, expressed in TU.
1572  */
1573 struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1574 	u64 timestamp;
1575 	u32 device_timestamp;
1576 	bool block_tx;
1577 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1578 	u8 count;
1579 	u32 delay;
1580 };
1581 
1582 /**
1583  * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1584  *
1585  * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1586  *	on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1587  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1588  *	monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1589  *	connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1590  *	provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1591  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1592  *	interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1593  *	but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1594  *	only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1595  * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1596  *	and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1597  *	this is not pure P2P vif.
1598  */
1599 enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1600 	IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER		= BIT(0),
1601 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI		= BIT(1),
1602 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD		= BIT(2),
1603 	IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE		= BIT(3),
1604 };
1605 
1606 /**
1607  * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1608  *
1609  * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1610  * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1611  *
1612  * @type: type of this virtual interface
1613  * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1614  *	or the BSS we're associated to
1615  * @addr: address of this interface
1616  * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1617  *	interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1618  * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1619  *	write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1620  *	for read access.
1621  * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
1622  * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1623  *	these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1624  *	or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1625  *	at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1626  * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1627  * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1628  * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1629  *	when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1630  *	path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1631  *	be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1632  *	processed after it switches back to %NULL.
1633  * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1634  *	interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1635  *	monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1636  * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1637  *	interface.
1638  * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211
1639  *	for this interface.
1640  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1641  *	sizeof(void \*).
1642  * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1643  * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1644  *	protected by fq->lock.
1645  */
1646 struct ieee80211_vif {
1647 	enum nl80211_iftype type;
1648 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1649 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1650 	bool p2p;
1651 	bool csa_active;
1652 	bool mu_mimo_owner;
1653 
1654 	u8 cab_queue;
1655 	u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1656 
1657 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1658 
1659 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1660 
1661 	u32 driver_flags;
1662 
1663 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1664 	struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1665 #endif
1666 
1667 	bool probe_req_reg;
1668 	bool rx_mcast_action_reg;
1669 
1670 	bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1671 
1672 	/* must be last */
1673 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1674 };
1675 
1676 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1677 {
1678 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1679 	return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1680 #endif
1681 	return false;
1682 }
1683 
1684 /**
1685  * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1686  * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1687  *
1688  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1689  * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1690  *
1691  * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1692  * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1693  * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1694  */
1695 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1696 
1697 /**
1698  * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1699  * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1700  *
1701  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1702  * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1703  *
1704  * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1705  * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1706  * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1707  */
1708 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1709 
1710 /**
1711  * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1712  *
1713  * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1714  * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1715  *
1716  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1717  *	driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1718  *	particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1719  *	will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1720  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1721  *	the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1722  *	generation in software.
1723  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1724  *	that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1725  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1726  *	CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1727  *	(MFP) to be done in software.
1728  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1729  *	if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1730  *	itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1731  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1732  *	not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1733  *	MIC.
1734  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1735  *	management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1736  *	crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1737  *	properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1738  *	fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1739  *	RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1740  *	%IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1741  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1742  *	driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1743  *	only for management frames (MFP).
1744  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1745  *	driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1746  *	be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1747  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1748  *	a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1749  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1750  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1751  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
1752  *	for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
1753  *	generation only
1754  */
1755 enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1756 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT	= BIT(0),
1757 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV		= BIT(1),
1758 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC	= BIT(2),
1759 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE		= BIT(3),
1760 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX		= BIT(4),
1761 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE		= BIT(5),
1762 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT		= BIT(6),
1763 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM	= BIT(7),
1764 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE	= BIT(8),
1765 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX		= BIT(9),
1766 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE	= BIT(10),
1767 };
1768 
1769 /**
1770  * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1771  *
1772  * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1773  * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1774  *
1775  * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1776  *	wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1777  *	encrypted in hardware.
1778  * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1779  * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1780  *	needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1781  * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1782  * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1783  * @keylen: key material length
1784  * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1785  * 	data block:
1786  * 	- Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1787  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1788  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1789  * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1790  * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1791  */
1792 struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1793 	atomic64_t tx_pn;
1794 	u32 cipher;
1795 	u8 icv_len;
1796 	u8 iv_len;
1797 	u8 hw_key_idx;
1798 	s8 keyidx;
1799 	u16 flags;
1800 	u8 keylen;
1801 	u8 key[];
1802 };
1803 
1804 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN	16
1805 
1806 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1807 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1808 
1809 /**
1810  * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1811  *
1812  * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1813  * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1814  *	reverse order than in packet)
1815  * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1816  *	reverse order than in packet)
1817  * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1818  *	reverse order than in packet)
1819  * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1820  *	reverse order than in packet)
1821  * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
1822  */
1823 struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1824 	union {
1825 		struct {
1826 			u32 iv32;
1827 			u16 iv16;
1828 		} tkip;
1829 		struct {
1830 			u8 pn[6];
1831 		} ccmp;
1832 		struct {
1833 			u8 pn[6];
1834 		} aes_cmac;
1835 		struct {
1836 			u8 pn[6];
1837 		} aes_gmac;
1838 		struct {
1839 			u8 pn[6];
1840 		} gcmp;
1841 		struct {
1842 			u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1843 			u8 seq_len;
1844 		} hw;
1845 	};
1846 };
1847 
1848 /**
1849  * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1850  *
1851  * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1852  * the secure packet crypto handling.
1853  *
1854  * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1855  * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1856  * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1857  * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1858  * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1859  * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1860  * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1861  * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1862  *     key_idx value calculation:
1863  *      (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1864  * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1865  */
1866 struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1867 	u32 cipher;
1868 	u16 iftype;
1869 	u8 hdr_len;
1870 	u8 pn_len;
1871 	u8 pn_off;
1872 	u8 key_idx_off;
1873 	u8 key_idx_mask;
1874 	u8 key_idx_shift;
1875 	u8 mic_len;
1876 };
1877 
1878 /**
1879  * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1880  *
1881  * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1882  * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1883  *
1884  * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1885  * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1886  */
1887 enum set_key_cmd {
1888 	SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
1889 };
1890 
1891 /**
1892  * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1893  *
1894  * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1895  *	this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1896  * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1897  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1898  * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1899  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1900  */
1901 enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1902 	/* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1903 	IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1904 	IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1905 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1906 	IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1907 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1908 };
1909 
1910 /**
1911  * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1912  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1913  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1914  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1915  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1916  *	(including 80+80 MHz)
1917  *
1918  * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1919  *	correctly, the values must be sorted.
1920  */
1921 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1922 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1923 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1924 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1925 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1926 };
1927 
1928 /**
1929  * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1930  *
1931  * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
1932  * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
1933  *	Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1934  */
1935 struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1936 	struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1937 	struct {
1938 		s8 idx;
1939 		u8 count;
1940 		u8 count_cts;
1941 		u8 count_rts;
1942 		u16 flags;
1943 	} rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1944 };
1945 
1946 /**
1947  * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
1948  *
1949  * Used to configure txpower for station.
1950  *
1951  * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
1952  *	to the STA.
1953  * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
1954  *	will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
1955  *	%type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
1956  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
1957  *	per peer TPC.
1958  */
1959 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
1960 	s16 power;
1961 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
1962 };
1963 
1964 /**
1965  * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1966  *
1967  * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1968  * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1969  * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1970  * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1971  * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
1972  * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
1973  *
1974  * @addr: MAC address
1975  * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
1976  * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
1977  * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1978  * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1979  * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
1980  * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities
1981  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
1982  *	that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
1983  *	Can be modified by driver.
1984  * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1985  *	otherwise always false)
1986  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1987  *	sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
1988  * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1989  *	if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
1990  *	IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
1991  * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
1992  * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
1993  * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1994  *	station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1995  *	notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1996  *	the station moves to associated state.
1997  * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
1998  * @rates: rate control selection table
1999  * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
2000  * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
2001  *	valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
2002  * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
2003  * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
2004  *	A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
2005  *	unlimited.
2006  * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
2007  * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
2008  * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
2009  * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration
2010  * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
2011  *	the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
2012  */
2013 struct ieee80211_sta {
2014 	u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
2015 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
2016 	u16 aid;
2017 	struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
2018 	struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
2019 	struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
2020 	struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa;
2021 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2022 	bool wme;
2023 	u8 uapsd_queues;
2024 	u8 max_sp;
2025 	u8 rx_nss;
2026 	enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
2027 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
2028 	struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
2029 	bool tdls;
2030 	bool tdls_initiator;
2031 	bool mfp;
2032 	u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
2033 
2034 	/**
2035 	 * @max_amsdu_len:
2036 	 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
2037 	 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
2038 	 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
2039 	 *
2040 	 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
2041 	 *   A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
2042 	 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal
2043 	 *   size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
2044 	 *
2045 	 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
2046 	 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
2047 	 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
2048 	 */
2049 	u16 max_amsdu_len;
2050 	bool support_p2p_ps;
2051 	u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2052 	u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2053 	struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2054 
2055 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2056 
2057 	/* must be last */
2058 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2059 };
2060 
2061 /**
2062  * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2063  *
2064  * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2065  * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2066  *
2067  * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2068  * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2069  */
2070 enum sta_notify_cmd {
2071 	STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2072 };
2073 
2074 /**
2075  * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2076  *
2077  * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2078  * 	it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2079  */
2080 struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2081 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2082 };
2083 
2084 /**
2085  * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2086  *
2087  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2088  * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2089  * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2090  *	%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2091  * @ac: the AC for this queue
2092  * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2093  *
2094  * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2095  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2096  */
2097 struct ieee80211_txq {
2098 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2099 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2100 	u8 tid;
2101 	u8 ac;
2102 
2103 	/* must be last */
2104 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2105 };
2106 
2107 /**
2108  * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2109  *
2110  * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2111  * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2112  * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2113  * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2114  * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2115  *
2116  * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2117  *	The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2118  *	controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2119  *	should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2120  *	will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2121  *	algorithm.
2122  *	Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2123  *	callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2124  *	the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2125  *	@use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2126  *	timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2127  *	CCK frames.
2128  *
2129  * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2130  *	Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2131  *	the FCS at the end.
2132  *
2133  * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2134  *	Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2135  *	for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2136  *	rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2137  *	to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2138  *	multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2139  *	the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2140  *
2141  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2142  *	Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2143  *	expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2144  *	If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2145  *
2146  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2147  *	Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2148  *	one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2149  *	between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2150  *
2151  * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2152  * 	Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2153  * 	Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2154  *
2155  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2156  *	Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2157  *
2158  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2159  *	Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2160  *
2161  * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2162  *	Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2163  *	stack support for dynamic PS.
2164  *
2165  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2166  *	Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2167  *
2168  * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2169  *	Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2170  *
2171  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2172  *	Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2173  *	the stack.
2174  *
2175  * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2176  *	The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2177  *	periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2178  *
2179  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2180  *	This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2181  *	dtim_period).
2182  *
2183  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2184  *	per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2185  *	the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2186  *	to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2187  *	possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2188  *	only in that case.
2189  *
2190  * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2191  *	autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2192  *	this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2193  *	stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2194  *	Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2195  *	the PS mode of connected stations.
2196  *
2197  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2198  *	setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2199  *	software.
2200  *
2201  * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2202  *	a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2203  *	active interfaces.
2204  *
2205  * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2206  *	be created.  It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2207  *	desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2208  *
2209  * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2210  *	crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2211  *	try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2212  *	the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2213  *	supported cipher suites.
2214  *
2215  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2216  *	this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2217  *	for frames.
2218  *
2219  * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2220  *	queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2221  *	for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2222  *	control for more details.
2223  *
2224  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2225  *	selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2226  *
2227  * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2228  *	P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2229  *	is supported.
2230  *
2231  * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2232  *	only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2233  *
2234  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2235  *	and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2236  *	using aggregation for such frames.)
2237  *
2238  * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2239  *	for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2240  *	is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2241  *	CSA frame.
2242  *
2243  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2244  *	or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2245  *
2246  * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2247  *	in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2248  *
2249  * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2250  *	than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2251  *
2252  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2253  *	within A-MPDU.
2254  *
2255  * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2256  *	for sent beacons.
2257  *
2258  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2259  *	station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2260  *	by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2261  *	from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2262  *
2263  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2264  *	reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2265  *	order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2266  *	timeout.
2267  *
2268  * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2269  *	which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2270  *
2271  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2272  *	A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2273  *	When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2274  *	limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2275  *	max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2276  *
2277  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2278  *	skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2279  *
2280  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2281  *	by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2282  *	drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2283  *	is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2284  *
2285  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2286  *	The stack will not do fragmentation.
2287  *	The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2288  *
2289  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2290  *	TDLS links.
2291  *
2292  * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2293  *	mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2294  *	deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2295  *	beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2296  *	virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2297  *	the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2298  *	deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2299  *
2300  * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2301  *	support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2302  *
2303  * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2304  *	course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2305  *
2306  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2307  *	extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2308  *	the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2309  *	but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2310  *	See also the documentation for that flag.
2311  *
2312  * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2313  *	MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2314  *	TXQs to start with.
2315  *
2316  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2317  *	length in tx status information
2318  *
2319  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2320  *
2321  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2322  *	only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2323  *
2324  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
2325  *	aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
2326  *	A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
2327  *
2328  * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2329  */
2330 enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2331 	IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2332 	IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2333 	IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2334 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2335 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2336 	IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2337 	IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2338 	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2339 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2340 	IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2341 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2342 	IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2343 	IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2344 	IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2345 	IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2346 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2347 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2348 	IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2349 	IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2350 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2351 	IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2352 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2353 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2354 	IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2355 	IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2356 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2357 	IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2358 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2359 	IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2360 	IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2361 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2362 	IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2363 	IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2364 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2365 	IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2366 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2367 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2368 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2369 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2370 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2371 	IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2372 	IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2373 	IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2374 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2375 	IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2376 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2377 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2378 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2379 	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2380 
2381 	/* keep last, obviously */
2382 	NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2383 };
2384 
2385 /**
2386  * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2387  *
2388  * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2389  * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2390  *
2391  * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2392  *	802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2393  *	members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2394  *	and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2395  *	bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2396  *
2397  * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2398  *
2399  * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2400  *	along with this structure.
2401  *
2402  * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2403  *
2404  * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2405  *	for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2406  *
2407  * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2408  *	Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2409  *
2410  * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2411  *	only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2412  *
2413  * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2414  *	that HW supports
2415  *
2416  * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2417  *	data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2418  *	queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2419  *
2420  * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2421  *	If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2422  *	set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2423  *
2424  * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2425  *	within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2426  * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2427  *	within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2428  * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2429  *	within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2430  * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2431  *	within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2432  *
2433  * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2434  *	can handle.
2435  * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2436  *	the hw can report back.
2437  * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2438  *
2439  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2440  *	sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2441  *	aggregation.
2442  *	This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2443  *	number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2444  *	it shouldn't be set.
2445  *
2446  * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2447  *	aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2448  *	advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2449  *	the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2450  *	with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2451  *	For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2452  *
2453  * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2454  *	of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2455  *
2456  * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2457  *	(if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2458  *
2459  * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2460  *	reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2461  *	include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2462  *	adding _BW is supported today.
2463  *
2464  * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2465  *	the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2466  *	Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2467  *
2468  * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2469  *
2470  * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2471  *	@units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2472  *	field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2473  *	device_timestamp.
2474  * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2475  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2476  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2477  * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2478  *	radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2479  *
2480  * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2481  *	from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2482  *	other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2483  *
2484  * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2485  *	for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2486  *	enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2487  *	Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2488  *	that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2489  *	neither enabled.
2490  *
2491  * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2492  *	deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2493  *	Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2494  *
2495  * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2496  * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2497  *	supported by HW.
2498  * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2499  *	device.
2500  *
2501  * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2502  *	them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2503  *	unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2504  *
2505  * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2506  *	refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2507  *
2508  * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set.
2509  */
2510 struct ieee80211_hw {
2511 	struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2512 	struct wiphy *wiphy;
2513 	const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2514 	void *priv;
2515 	unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2516 	unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2517 	unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2518 	int vif_data_size;
2519 	int sta_data_size;
2520 	int chanctx_data_size;
2521 	int txq_data_size;
2522 	u16 queues;
2523 	u16 max_listen_interval;
2524 	s8 max_signal;
2525 	u8 max_rates;
2526 	u8 max_report_rates;
2527 	u8 max_rate_tries;
2528 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2529 	u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2530 	u8 max_tx_fragments;
2531 	u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2532 	u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2533 	u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2534 	struct {
2535 		int units_pos;
2536 		s16 accuracy;
2537 	} radiotap_timestamp;
2538 	netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2539 	u8 uapsd_queues;
2540 	u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2541 	u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2542 	const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
2543 	u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2544 	u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2545 	u8 weight_multiplier;
2546 	u32 max_mtu;
2547 };
2548 
2549 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2550 				       enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2551 {
2552 	return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2553 }
2554 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2555 
2556 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2557 				     enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2558 {
2559 	return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2560 }
2561 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2562 
2563 /**
2564  * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2565  *
2566  * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2567  * @req: cfg80211 request.
2568  */
2569 struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2570 	struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2571 
2572 	/* Keep last */
2573 	struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2574 };
2575 
2576 /**
2577  * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2578  *
2579  * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2580  * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2581  * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2582  * @status: channel-switch response status
2583  * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2584  * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2585  * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2586  * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2587  * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2588  */
2589 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2590 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2591 	struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2592 	u8 action_code;
2593 	u32 status;
2594 	u32 timestamp;
2595 	u16 switch_time;
2596 	u16 switch_timeout;
2597 	struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2598 	u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2599 };
2600 
2601 /**
2602  * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2603  *
2604  * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2605  *
2606  * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2607  * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2608  * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2609  * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2610  * is already used internally by mac80211.
2611  *
2612  * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2613  */
2614 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2615 
2616 /**
2617  * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2618  *
2619  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2620  * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2621  */
2622 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2623 {
2624 	set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2625 }
2626 
2627 /**
2628  * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2629  *
2630  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2631  * @addr: the address to set
2632  */
2633 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2634 {
2635 	memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2636 }
2637 
2638 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2639 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2640 		      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2641 {
2642 	if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2643 		return NULL;
2644 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2645 }
2646 
2647 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2648 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2649 			   const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2650 {
2651 	if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2652 		return NULL;
2653 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2654 }
2655 
2656 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2657 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2658 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2659 {
2660 	if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2661 		return NULL;
2662 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2663 }
2664 
2665 /**
2666  * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2667  * @hw: the hardware
2668  * @skb: the skb
2669  *
2670  * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure
2671  * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2672  */
2673 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2674 
2675 /**
2676  * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2677  *
2678  * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2679  * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2680  *
2681  * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2682  * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2683  * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2684  * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2685  * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2686  * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2687  * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2688  *
2689  * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2690  * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2691  * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2692  *
2693  * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2694  * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2695  * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2696  * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2697  *
2698  * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2699  * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2700  * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2701  * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2702  *
2703  * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2704  *
2705  * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2706  * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2707  * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2708  * based on the receive flags.
2709  *
2710  * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2711  * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2712  * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2713  * keys.
2714  *
2715  * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2716  * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2717  * handler.
2718  * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
2719  * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2720  * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2721  * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
2722  * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
2723  * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
2724  *
2725  * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2726  * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2727  * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
2728  *
2729  * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
2730  * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to to following
2731  * requirements:
2732  * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to
2733       mac80211 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been
2734       completed when also setting @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV for any key,
2735    2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
2736       at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
2737    3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
2738       encrypted with the new key and
2739    4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
2740    Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
2741  */
2742 
2743 /**
2744  * DOC: Powersave support
2745  *
2746  * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2747  *
2748  * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2749  * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2750  * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2751  * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2752  * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2753  * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2754  * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2755  * it finds traffic directed to it.
2756  *
2757  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2758  * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2759  * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
2760  * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2761  * back to sleep at appropriate times.
2762  *
2763  * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2764  * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2765  * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
2766  *
2767  * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2768  * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2769  * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2770  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
2771  * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2772  * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
2773  * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
2774  *
2775  * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2776  * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2777  * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2778  * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2779  * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2780  * periods.
2781  *
2782  * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
2783  * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2784  * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2785  * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2786  * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2787  * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2788  * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2789  * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2790  * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2791  * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2792  *
2793  * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2794  * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
2795  * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
2796  * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2797  * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2798  * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2799  *
2800  * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2801  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
2802  */
2803 
2804 /**
2805  * DOC: Beacon filter support
2806  *
2807  * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
2808  * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
2809  * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2810  * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2811  * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2812  * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2813  * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2814  *
2815  * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2816  * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
2817  * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2818  * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2819  * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2820  *
2821  * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2822  * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2823  * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2824  * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2825  *
2826  * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2827  * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2828  * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2829  * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2830  *
2831  *  - a list of information element IDs
2832  *  - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2833  *
2834  * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2835  * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2836  * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2837  * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2838  * vendor information elements.
2839  *
2840  * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2841  * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2842  *
2843  * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2844  * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2845  * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2846  * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2847  * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2848  * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2849  *
2850  *
2851  * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2852  * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2853  * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2854  * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2855  * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2856  * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2857  * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2858  * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2859  *
2860  * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2861  * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2862  * signal strength threshold checking.
2863  */
2864 
2865 /**
2866  * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2867  *
2868  * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2869  * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2870  * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2871  * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2872  *
2873  * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2874  * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2875  * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2876  * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2877  * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2878  * hardware flags.
2879  *
2880  * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2881  * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2882  * turned off otherwise.
2883  *
2884  * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2885  * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2886  * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2887  * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2888  */
2889 
2890 /**
2891  * DOC: Frame filtering
2892  *
2893  * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2894  * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2895  * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2896  * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2897  * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2898  *
2899  * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2900  * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2901  * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2902  *
2903  * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2904  * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2905  * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2906  * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2907  * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2908  * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2909  * @total_flags with the new flag states.
2910  *
2911  * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2912  * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2913  * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2914  * or dropped.
2915  *
2916  * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2917  * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2918  * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2919  * the flag, but not clear it.
2920  * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2921  * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2922  * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2923  * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2924  * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2925  * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2926  * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2927  * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
2928  */
2929 
2930 /**
2931  * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2932  *
2933  * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2934  * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2935  * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2936  *
2937  * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2938  * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2939  * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2940  * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2941  * the driver code.
2942  *
2943  * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2944  * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2945  * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2946  * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2947  * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2948  * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2949  * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2950  *
2951  * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2952  * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2953  * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2954  * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2955  * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2956  * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2957  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2958  * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2959  * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2960  * @sta_notify callback.
2961  *
2962  * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2963  * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2964  * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2965  * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2966  * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2967  * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2968  * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
2969  * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
2970  * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2971  * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2972  * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2973  * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2974  * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2975  * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2976  *
2977  * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2978  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2979  *
2980  * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2981  * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2982  * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2983  * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2984  * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2985  * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2986  * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2987  * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2988  * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2989  * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2990  * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2991  *
2992  * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2993  * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2994  * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2995  * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2996  * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2997  * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2998  * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2999  * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
3000  * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
3001  * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
3002  * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
3003  * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
3004  * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
3005  * buffers for those TIDs contain.
3006  *
3007  * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
3008  * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
3009  * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
3010  * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
3011  * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
3012  * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
3013  * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
3014  *
3015  * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
3016  * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
3017  * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
3018  * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
3019  * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
3020  *
3021  * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
3022  * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
3023  * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
3024  * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
3025  */
3026 
3027 /**
3028  * DOC: HW queue control
3029  *
3030  * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
3031  * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
3032  * was problematic for a few reasons:
3033  * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
3034  * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
3035  * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
3036  *
3037  * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
3038  * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
3039  * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
3040  *
3041  * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
3042  * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
3043  * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
3044  * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
3045  * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
3046  * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
3047  * the hardware queue.
3048  * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
3049  * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
3050  *
3051  * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
3052  * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3053  * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3054  * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3055  * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3056  *
3057  * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3058  * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3059  * after-DTIM queue for AP:   8
3060  * off-channel queue:         9
3061  *
3062  * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3063  *   hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3064  *
3065  * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3066  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3067  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3068  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3069  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3070  *   vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3071  * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3072  *
3073  * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3074  * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3075  *
3076  * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3077  * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3078  * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3079  * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3080  */
3081 
3082 /**
3083  * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3084  *
3085  * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3086  * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3087  * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3088  * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3089  *
3090  * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3091  *	by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3092  *	multicast address.
3093  *
3094  * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3095  *	%RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3096  *
3097  * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3098  *	the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3099  *
3100  * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3101  *	to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3102  *	by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3103  *	mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3104  *	honour this flag if possible.
3105  *
3106  * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3107  *	station
3108  *
3109  * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3110  *
3111  * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3112  *
3113  * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3114  *
3115  * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames
3116  */
3117 enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3118 	FIF_ALLMULTI		= 1<<1,
3119 	FIF_FCSFAIL		= 1<<2,
3120 	FIF_PLCPFAIL		= 1<<3,
3121 	FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC	= 1<<4,
3122 	FIF_CONTROL		= 1<<5,
3123 	FIF_OTHER_BSS		= 1<<6,
3124 	FIF_PSPOLL		= 1<<7,
3125 	FIF_PROBE_REQ		= 1<<8,
3126 	FIF_MCAST_ACTION	= 1<<9,
3127 };
3128 
3129 /**
3130  * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3131  *
3132  * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3133  * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3134  *
3135  * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3136  * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3137  * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3138  * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3139  *
3140  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3141  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3142  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either
3143  *	call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or
3144  *	call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status
3145  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after
3146  *	ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special
3147  *	status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE.
3148  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3149  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3150  *	queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3151  *	driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3152  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3153  *	called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3154  *	ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3155  *	session is gone and removes the station.
3156  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3157  *	but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3158  *	now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3159  *	should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3160  */
3161 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3162 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3163 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3164 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3165 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3166 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3167 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3168 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3169 };
3170 
3171 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1
3172 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2
3173 
3174 /**
3175  * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3176  *
3177  * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3178  * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3179  * @tid: tid of the BA session
3180  * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3181  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3182  *	actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3183  * @buf_size: reorder buffer size  (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3184  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3185  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3186  * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3187  *	valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3188  * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3189  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3190  */
3191 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3192 	enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3193 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3194 	u16 tid;
3195 	u16 ssn;
3196 	u16 buf_size;
3197 	bool amsdu;
3198 	u16 timeout;
3199 };
3200 
3201 /**
3202  * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3203  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3204  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3205  *	frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3206  */
3207 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3208 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3209 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3210 };
3211 
3212 /**
3213  * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3214  *
3215  * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3216  *	to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3217  *	information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3218  *	flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3219  * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3220  * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3221  *	changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3222  *	the peer.
3223  * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3224  *	by the peer
3225  */
3226 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3227 	IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED		= BIT(0),
3228 	IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED	= BIT(1),
3229 	IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED	= BIT(2),
3230 	IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED	= BIT(3),
3231 };
3232 
3233 /**
3234  * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3235  *
3236  * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3237  * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3238  * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa).
3239  * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3240  * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3241  *
3242  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3243  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3244  *	for sending management frames offchannel.
3245  */
3246 enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3247 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3248 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3249 };
3250 
3251 /**
3252  * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
3253  *
3254  * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3255  * reconfiguration type was completed.
3256  *
3257  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3258  *	(also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3259  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3260  *	of wowlan configuration)
3261  */
3262 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3263 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3264 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3265 };
3266 
3267 /**
3268  * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3269  *
3270  * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3271  * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3272  * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3273  *
3274  * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3275  *	skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3276  *	The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3277  *	configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3278  *	preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3279  *	Must be atomic.
3280  *
3281  * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3282  *	is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3283  *	frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3284  *	Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3285  *	or zero.
3286  *	When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3287  *	to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3288  *	is added.
3289  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3290  *
3291  * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3292  *	is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3293  *	it must turn off frame reception.)
3294  *	May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3295  *	an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3296  *	you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3297  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3298  *
3299  * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3300  *	stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3301  *	ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3302  *	configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3303  *	reconfigured at resume time.
3304  *	The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3305  *	wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3306  *	supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3307  *	must return 1 from this function.
3308  *
3309  * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3310  *	now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3311  *	functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3312  *	to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3313  *	will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3314  *
3315  * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3316  *	modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3317  *	supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3318  *	in suspend().
3319  *
3320  * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3321  *	enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3322  *	and @stop must be implemented.
3323  *	The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3324  *	the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3325  *	interface is given in the conf parameter.
3326  *	The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3327  *	negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3328  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3329  *
3330  * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3331  *	is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3332  *	switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3333  *	Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3334  *	found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3335  *
3336  * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3337  *	The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3338  *	and no monitor interfaces are present.
3339  *	When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3340  *	must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3341  *	the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3342  *	MAC address of the device going away.
3343  *	Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3344  *
3345  * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3346  *	function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3347  *	This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3348  *	if it does. The callback can sleep.
3349  *
3350  * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3351  *	parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3352  *	level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3353  *	This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3354  *	for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3355  *	of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3356  *	can sleep.
3357  *
3358  * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3359  *	This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3360  *	to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3361  *
3362  * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3363  *	See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3364  *	This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3365  *
3366  * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3367  *	This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3368  *	should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3369  *	of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3370  *	which flags are changed.
3371  *	This callback can sleep.
3372  *
3373  * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3374  * 	must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3375  *
3376  * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3377  *	This callback is only called between add_interface and
3378  *	remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3379  *	is enabled.
3380  *	Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3381  *	The callback can sleep.
3382  *
3383  * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3384  * 	This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3385  * 	which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3386  *	The callback must be atomic.
3387  *
3388  * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3389  *	host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3390  *	necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3391  *	After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3392  *	userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3393  *
3394  * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3395  *	WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3396  *	offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3397  *
3398  * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3399  *	the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3400  *	configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3401  *	registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3402  *	that power save is disabled.
3403  *	The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3404  *	entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3405  *	at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3406  *	(extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3407  *	When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3408  *	note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3409  *	any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3410  *	This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3411  *	this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3412  *	software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3413  *	capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3414  *	advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3415  *	The callback can sleep.
3416  *
3417  * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3418  *	The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3419  *	but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3420  *	ieee80211_scan_completed().
3421  *	This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3422  *	scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3423  *	The callback can sleep.
3424  *
3425  * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3426  *	specific intervals.  The driver must call the
3427  *	ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3428  *	This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3429  *
3430  * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3431  *	In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3432  *
3433  * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3434  *	is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3435  *	The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3436  *	the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3437  *	can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3438  *
3439  * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3440  *	software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3441  *	this notification.
3442  *	The callback can sleep.
3443  *
3444  * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3445  * 	Returns zero if statistics are available.
3446  *	The callback can sleep.
3447  *
3448  * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3449  *	IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3450  *	IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3451  *	The callback must be atomic.
3452  *
3453  * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3454  *	if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3455  *	stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3456  *	should be set as well.
3457  *	The callback can sleep.
3458  *
3459  * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3460  *	The callback can sleep.
3461  *
3462  * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3463  *	AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3464  *
3465  * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3466  *	station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3467  *	returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3468  *	no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3469  *	the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3470  *	This callback can sleep.
3471  *
3472  * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3473  *	when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3474  *	should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3475  *	callback can sleep.
3476  *
3477  * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3478  *	associated station, AP,  IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3479  *	in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3480  *	%IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3481  *
3482  * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx
3483  *	power for the station.
3484  *	This callback can sleep.
3485  *
3486  * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3487  *	station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3488  *	This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3489  *	It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3490  *	up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3491  *	isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3492  *	period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3493  *	See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3494  *	The callback can sleep.
3495  *
3496  * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3497  *	synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3498  *	pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3499  *	the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3500  *	in @sta_state.
3501  *	The callback can sleep.
3502  *
3503  * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3504  *	used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3505  *	from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3506  *	in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3507  *	uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3508  *	otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3509  *	Must be atomic.
3510  * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3511  *	is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3512  *	the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3513  *
3514  * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3515  *	filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3516  *	let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3517  *	the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3518  *	all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3519  *	Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3520  *	The callback can sleep.
3521  *
3522  * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3523  *	bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3524  *	Returns a negative error code on failure.
3525  *	The callback can sleep.
3526  *
3527  * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3528  *	this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3529  *	required function.
3530  *	The callback can sleep.
3531  *
3532  * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3533  *	Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3534  *	required function.
3535  *	The callback can sleep.
3536  *
3537  * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3538  *	firmware/hardware.  Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3539  *	calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3540  *	as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3541  *	The callback can sleep.
3542  *
3543  * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3544  *	with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3545  *	function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3546  *	TSF synchronization.
3547  *	The callback can sleep.
3548  *
3549  * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3550  *	This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3551  *	used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3552  *	Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3553  *	The callback can sleep.
3554  *
3555  * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3556  *
3557  * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3558  *	need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3559  *	and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3560  *	The callback can sleep.
3561  *
3562  * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3563  *	in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3564  *	accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3565  *	estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3566  *	coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3567  *
3568  * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3569  *	be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3570  * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3571  *
3572  * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3573  *	that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3574  *	of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3575  *	use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3576  *	If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3577  *	Note that vif can be NULL.
3578  *	The callback can sleep.
3579  *
3580  * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3581  *	switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3582  *	callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3583  *	completion of the channel switch.
3584  *
3585  * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3586  *	Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3587  *	reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3588  *	(also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3589  *
3590  * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3591  *
3592  * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3593  *	call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3594  *	that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3595  *	offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3596  *	normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3597  *	duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3598  *	ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3599  *	Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3600  *	must be accepted in this case.
3601  *	This callback may sleep.
3602  * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3603  *	aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3604  *
3605  * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3606  *
3607  * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3608  *
3609  * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3610  *	queues before entering power save.
3611  *
3612  * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3613  *	when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3614  *	The callback can sleep.
3615  * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3616  *	&enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3617  *	The callback must be atomic.
3618  *
3619  * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3620  *	parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3621  *	sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3622  *	to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3623  *	Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3624  *	if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3625  *	the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3626  *	the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3627  *	more-data bit must always be set.
3628  *	The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3629  *	from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3630  *	In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3631  *	@num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3632  *	this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3633  *	on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3634  *	period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3635  *	responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3636  *	In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3637  *	bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3638  *	at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3639  *	setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3640  *	service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3641  *	on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3642  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3643  *	This callback must be atomic.
3644  * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3645  *	to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3646  *	via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3647  *	released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3648  *	and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3649  *	frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3650  *	them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3651  *	on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3652  *	bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3653  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3654  *	The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3655  *	frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3656  *	This callback must be atomic.
3657  *
3658  * @get_et_sset_count:  Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3659  *
3660  * @get_et_stats:  Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3661  *
3662  * @get_et_strings:  Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3663  *	and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3664  *
3665  * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3666  *	before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3667  *	bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3668  *	yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3669  *	transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3670  *	powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3671  *	management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3672  *	driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3673  *	and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3674  *	For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3675  *	would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3676  *	frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
3677  *	The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3678  *	mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3679  *      If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the
3680  *      duration for which the operation is requested.
3681  *	The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3682  *
3683  * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3684  *	a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3685  *	channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3686  *	setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3687  *	mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3688  *	discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3689  *	2 * (DTIM period).
3690  *	The callback is optional and can sleep.
3691  *
3692  * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3693  *	This callback may sleep.
3694  * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3695  *	This callback may sleep.
3696  * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3697  *	may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3698  *	channel context with different settings
3699  *	This callback may sleep.
3700  * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3701  *	to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3702  *	This callback may sleep.
3703  * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3704  *	unbound from vif.
3705  *	This callback may sleep.
3706  * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3707  *	another, as specified in the list of
3708  *	@ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3709  *	to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3710  *	This callback may sleep.
3711  *
3712  * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3713  *	information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3714  *	context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3715  *	software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3716  *	just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3717  *	disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3718  * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
3719  *
3720  * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3721  *	during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3722  *	This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3723  *	indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3724  *	This callback may sleep.
3725  *
3726  * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3727  *	Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3728  *	This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
3729  *
3730  * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3731  *	Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3732  *	function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
3733  *	decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
3734  *	ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3735  *	get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
3736  *	1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
3737  *	transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
3738  *	If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3739  *	since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
3740  * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3741  *	before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3742  *	gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3743  *	the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
3744  * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3745  *	after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3746  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3747  * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3748  *	when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
3749  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3750  * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
3751  *	when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
3752  *	CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
3753  * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3754  *	information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3755  *	channel context is bound before this is called.
3756  * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
3757  *
3758  * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3759  *	specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3760  *	if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
3761  *
3762  * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3763  *	and hardware limits.
3764  *
3765  * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3766  *	is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3767  *	and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3768  *	driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3769  *	the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3770  *	The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3771  *	optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3772  * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3773  *	peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
3774  * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3775  *	response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3776  *	parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3777  *	an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3778  *	response template is provided, together with the location of the
3779  *	switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3780  *	the function call.
3781  *
3782  * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
3783  * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3784  *	synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3785  *	pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3786  *	currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
3787  *
3788  * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3789  * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
3790  * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3791  *	contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3792  *	are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3793  *	The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3794  *	some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3795  *	changed parameters.
3796  * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3797  *	cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3798  *	this call.
3799  * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3800  *	ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3801  *	NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
3802  * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
3803  *	aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
3804  *	between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
3805  *	skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
3806  * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
3807  *	Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
3808  *
3809  * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
3810  * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
3811  * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep.
3812  * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer.
3813  *	This callback may sleep.
3814  */
3815 struct ieee80211_ops {
3816 	void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3817 		   struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3818 		   struct sk_buff *skb);
3819 	int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3820 	void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3821 #ifdef CONFIG_PM
3822 	int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3823 	int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3824 	void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
3825 #endif
3826 	int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3827 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3828 	int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3829 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3830 				enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
3831 	void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3832 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3833 	int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
3834 	void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3835 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3836 				 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3837 				 u32 changed);
3838 
3839 	int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3840 	void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3841 
3842 	u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3843 				 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
3844 	void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3845 				 unsigned int changed_flags,
3846 				 unsigned int *total_flags,
3847 				 u64 multicast);
3848 	void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3849 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3850 				    unsigned int filter_flags,
3851 				    unsigned int changed_flags);
3852 	int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3853 		       bool set);
3854 	int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
3855 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3856 		       struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
3857 	void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3858 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3859 				struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3860 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3861 				u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
3862 	void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3863 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3864 			       struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
3865 	void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3866 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
3867 	int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3868 		       struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
3869 	void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3870 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3871 	int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3872 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3873 				struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
3874 				struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
3875 	int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3876 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3877 	void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3878 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3879 			      const u8 *mac_addr);
3880 	void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3881 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3882 	int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3883 			 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
3884 	void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3885 			    struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3886 			    struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3887 	int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3888 	int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3889 	int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3890 		       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3891 	int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3892 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3893 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3894 	void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3895 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3896 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3897 				struct dentry *dir);
3898 #endif
3899 	void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3900 			enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3901 	int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3902 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3903 			     struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3904 	int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3905 			 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3906 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3907 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
3908 	void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3909 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3910 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3911 	void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3912 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3913 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3914 			      u32 changed);
3915 	void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3916 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3917 				    struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3918 	void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3919 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3920 			       struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3921 			       struct station_info *sinfo);
3922 	int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3923 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
3924 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
3925 	u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3926 	void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3927 			u64 tsf);
3928 	void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3929 			   s64 offset);
3930 	void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3931 	int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3932 
3933 	/**
3934 	 * @ampdu_action:
3935 	 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
3936 	 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3937 	 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3938 	 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3939 	 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
3940 	 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
3941 	 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3942 	 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3943 	 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3944 	 *
3945 	 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
3946 	 * - ``RX:  2....7`` (lost frame #1)
3947 	 * - ``TX:        8..1...``
3948 	 *
3949 	 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3950 	 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3951 	 *
3952 	 * - ``TX:        1   or``
3953 	 * - ``TX:        18  or``
3954 	 * - ``TX:        81``
3955 	 *
3956 	 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3957 	 *
3958 	 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return
3959 	 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START
3960 	 * if the session can start immediately.
3961 	 *
3962 	 * The callback can sleep.
3963 	 */
3964 	int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3965 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3966 			    struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
3967 	int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3968 		struct survey_info *survey);
3969 	void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3970 	void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
3971 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
3972 	int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3973 			    void *data, int len);
3974 	int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3975 			     struct netlink_callback *cb,
3976 			     void *data, int len);
3977 #endif
3978 	void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3979 		      u32 queues, bool drop);
3980 	void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3981 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3982 			       struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
3983 	int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3984 	int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
3985 
3986 	int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3987 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3988 				 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
3989 				 int duration,
3990 				 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
3991 	int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3992 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3993 	int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3994 	void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3995 			      u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
3996 	bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3997 	int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3998 				const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
3999 	void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4000 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4001 			       const struct ieee80211_event *event);
4002 
4003 	void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4004 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4005 				      u16 tids, int num_frames,
4006 				      enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4007 				      bool more_data);
4008 	void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4009 					struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4010 					u16 tids, int num_frames,
4011 					enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4012 					bool more_data);
4013 
4014 	int	(*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4015 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
4016 	void	(*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4017 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4018 				struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
4019 	void	(*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4020 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4021 				  u32 sset, u8 *data);
4022 
4023 	void	(*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4024 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4025 				  u16 duration);
4026 
4027 	void	(*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4028 					     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4029 
4030 	int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4031 			   struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4032 	void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4033 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4034 	void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4035 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
4036 			       u32 changed);
4037 	int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4038 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4039 				  struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4040 	void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4041 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4042 				     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4043 	int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4044 				  struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
4045 				  int n_vifs,
4046 				  enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
4047 
4048 	void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4049 				  enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
4050 
4051 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
4052 	void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4053 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4054 				 struct inet6_dev *idev);
4055 #endif
4056 	void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4057 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4058 				      struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4059 	int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4060 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4061 				  struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4062 
4063 	int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4064 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4065 	void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4066 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4067 	void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4068 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4069 					 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4070 
4071 	int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4072 	void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4073 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4074 				       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4075 	int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4076 			   int *dbm);
4077 
4078 	int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4079 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4080 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4081 				   struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4082 				   struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4083 	void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4084 					   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4085 					   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4086 	void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4087 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4088 					 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4089 
4090 	void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4091 			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4092 	void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4093 
4094 	int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4095 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4096 			 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4097 	int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4098 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4099 	int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4100 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4101 			       struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4102 	int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4103 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4104 			    const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4105 	void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4106 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4107 			    u8 instance_id);
4108 	bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4109 				       struct sk_buff *head,
4110 				       struct sk_buff *skb);
4111 	int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4112 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4113 				       struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4114 	int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4115 			  struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4116 	void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4117 			   struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4118 	int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4119 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4120 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4121 			      struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf);
4122 	int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4123 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4124 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids);
4125 };
4126 
4127 /**
4128  * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4129  *
4130  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4131  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4132  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4133  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4134  * @priv_data_len.
4135  *
4136  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4137  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4138  * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4139  *	NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4140  *
4141  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4142  */
4143 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4144 					   const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4145 					   const char *requested_name);
4146 
4147 /**
4148  * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4149  *
4150  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4151  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4152  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4153  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4154  * @priv_data_len.
4155  *
4156  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4157  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4158  *
4159  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4160  */
4161 static inline
4162 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4163 					const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4164 {
4165 	return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4166 }
4167 
4168 /**
4169  * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4170  *
4171  * You must call this function before any other functions in
4172  * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4173  * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4174  *
4175  * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4176  *
4177  * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4178  */
4179 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4180 
4181 /**
4182  * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4183  * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4184  * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4185  *	(full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4186  */
4187 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4188 	int throughput;
4189 	int blink_time;
4190 };
4191 
4192 /**
4193  * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4194  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4195  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4196  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4197  *	interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4198  */
4199 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4200 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO		= BIT(0),
4201 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK		= BIT(1),
4202 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED	= BIT(2),
4203 };
4204 
4205 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4206 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4207 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4208 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4209 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4210 const char *
4211 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4212 				   unsigned int flags,
4213 				   const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4214 				   unsigned int blink_table_len);
4215 #endif
4216 /**
4217  * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4218  *
4219  * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4220  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4221  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4222  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4223  *
4224  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4225  *
4226  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4227  */
4228 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4229 {
4230 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4231 	return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4232 #else
4233 	return NULL;
4234 #endif
4235 }
4236 
4237 /**
4238  * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4239  *
4240  * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4241  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4242  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4243  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4244  *
4245  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4246  *
4247  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4248  */
4249 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4250 {
4251 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4252 	return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4253 #else
4254 	return NULL;
4255 #endif
4256 }
4257 
4258 /**
4259  * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4260  *
4261  * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4262  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4263  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4264  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4265  *
4266  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4267  *
4268  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4269  */
4270 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4271 {
4272 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4273 	return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4274 #else
4275 	return NULL;
4276 #endif
4277 }
4278 
4279 /**
4280  * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4281  *
4282  * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4283  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4284  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4285  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4286  *
4287  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4288  *
4289  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4290  */
4291 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4292 {
4293 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4294 	return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4295 #else
4296 	return NULL;
4297 #endif
4298 }
4299 
4300 /**
4301  * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4302  * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4303  * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4304  * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4305  * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4306  *
4307  * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4308  * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4309  *
4310  * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4311  */
4312 static inline const char *
4313 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4314 				 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4315 				 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4316 {
4317 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4318 	return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4319 						  blink_table_len);
4320 #else
4321 	return NULL;
4322 #endif
4323 }
4324 
4325 /**
4326  * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4327  *
4328  * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4329  * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4330  *
4331  * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4332  */
4333 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4334 
4335 /**
4336  * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4337  *
4338  * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4339  * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4340  * before calling this function.
4341  *
4342  * @hw: the hardware to free
4343  */
4344 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4345 
4346 /**
4347  * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4348  *
4349  * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4350  * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4351  * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4352  * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4353  * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4354  * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4355  *
4356  * @hw: the hardware to restart
4357  */
4358 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4359 
4360 /**
4361  * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4362  *
4363  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4364  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4365  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4366  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4367  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4368  *
4369  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4370  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4371  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4372  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4373  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4374  *
4375  * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4376  *
4377  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4378  * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4379  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4380  * @napi: the NAPI context
4381  */
4382 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4383 		       struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4384 
4385 /**
4386  * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4387  *
4388  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4389  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4390  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4391  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4392  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4393  *
4394  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4395  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4396  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4397  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4398  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4399  *
4400  * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4401  *
4402  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4403  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4404  */
4405 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4406 {
4407 	ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4408 }
4409 
4410 /**
4411  * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4412  *
4413  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4414  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4415  *
4416  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4417  * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4418  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4419  *
4420  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4421  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4422  */
4423 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4424 
4425 /**
4426  * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4427  *
4428  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4429  * (internally disables bottom halves).
4430  *
4431  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4432  * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4433  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4434  *
4435  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4436  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4437  */
4438 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4439 				   struct sk_buff *skb)
4440 {
4441 	local_bh_disable();
4442 	ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4443 	local_bh_enable();
4444 }
4445 
4446 /**
4447  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4448  *
4449  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4450  * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4451  * entering/leaving PS mode.
4452  *
4453  * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4454  *
4455  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4456  * each other.
4457  *
4458  * @sta: currently connected sta
4459  * @start: start or stop PS
4460  *
4461  * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4462  */
4463 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4464 
4465 /**
4466  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4467  *                                  (in process context)
4468  *
4469  * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4470  * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4471  * applies.
4472  *
4473  * @sta: currently connected sta
4474  * @start: start or stop PS
4475  *
4476  * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4477  */
4478 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4479 						  bool start)
4480 {
4481 	int ret;
4482 
4483 	local_bh_disable();
4484 	ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4485 	local_bh_enable();
4486 
4487 	return ret;
4488 }
4489 
4490 /**
4491  * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4492  * @sta: currently connected station
4493  *
4494  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4495  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4496  * connected station was received.
4497  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4498  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4499  * be serialized.
4500  */
4501 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4502 
4503 /**
4504  * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4505  * @sta: currently connected station
4506  * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4507  *
4508  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4509  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4510  * from a connected station was received.
4511  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4512  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4513  * serialized.
4514  * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4515  * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4516  * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4517  * checks.
4518  */
4519 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4520 
4521 /*
4522  * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4523  * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4524  */
4525 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM	ALIGN(14, 4)
4526 
4527 /**
4528  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4529  * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4530  * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4531  * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4532  *
4533  * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4534  * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4535  * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4536  *
4537  * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4538  * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4539  * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4540  * call! Beware of the locking!)
4541  *
4542  * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4543  * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4544  * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4545  * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4546  * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4547  * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4548  *
4549  * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4550  * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4551  * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4552  * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4553  * use this API.
4554  */
4555 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4556 				u8 tid, bool buffered);
4557 
4558 /**
4559  * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4560  *
4561  * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4562  * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4563  * rate selection table for the station entry.
4564  *
4565  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4566  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4567  * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4568  * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4569  * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4570  */
4571 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4572 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4573 			    struct sk_buff *skb,
4574 			    struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4575 			    int max_rates);
4576 
4577 /**
4578  * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4579  *
4580  * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4581  * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4582  * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4583  * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4584  * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4585  * slow stations to starve).
4586  *
4587  * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4588  * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4589  */
4590 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4591 					   u32 thr);
4592 
4593 /**
4594  * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
4595  *
4596  * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
4597  * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
4598  * in updating the tx rate in data path.
4599  *
4600  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4601  * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
4602  * @info: tx status information
4603  */
4604 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4605 			      struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4606 			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4607 
4608 /**
4609  * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4610  *
4611  * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4612  * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4613  * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4614  *
4615  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4616  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
4617  * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
4618  * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4619  * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
4620  *
4621  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4622  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4623  */
4624 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4625 			 struct sk_buff *skb);
4626 
4627 /**
4628  * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4629  *
4630  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4631  * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4632  * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4633  *
4634  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4635  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4636  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4637  *
4638  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4639  * @status: tx status information
4640  */
4641 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4642 			     struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4643 
4644 /**
4645  * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4646  *
4647  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4648  * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4649  * specific skbs.
4650  *
4651  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4652  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4653  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4654  *
4655  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4656  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4657  *	(NULL for multicast packets)
4658  * @info: tx status information
4659  */
4660 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4661 					     struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4662 					     struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4663 {
4664 	struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4665 		.sta = sta,
4666 		.info = info,
4667 	};
4668 
4669 	ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4670 }
4671 
4672 /**
4673  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4674  *
4675  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4676  *
4677  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4678  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4679  * for a single hardware.
4680  *
4681  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4682  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4683  */
4684 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4685 					  struct sk_buff *skb)
4686 {
4687 	local_bh_disable();
4688 	ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4689 	local_bh_enable();
4690 }
4691 
4692 /**
4693  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
4694  *
4695  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4696  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4697  *
4698  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4699  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4700  *
4701  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4702  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4703  */
4704 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4705 				 struct sk_buff *skb);
4706 
4707 /**
4708  * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format
4709  *
4710  * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit
4711  * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which
4712  * are are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap
4713  * 802.11 frames.
4714  *
4715  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4716  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all
4717  * calls in the same tx status family.
4718  *
4719  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4720  * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted
4721  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4722  */
4723 void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4724 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4725 			       struct sk_buff *skb);
4726 
4727 /**
4728  * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4729  *
4730  * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4731  * connected STA.
4732  *
4733  * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4734  * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4735  */
4736 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4737 
4738 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4739 
4740 /**
4741  * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4742  * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4743  * @tim_length: size of TIM element
4744  * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4745  *	to CSA counters.  This array can contain zero values which
4746  *	should be ignored.
4747  */
4748 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4749 	u16 tim_offset;
4750 	u16 tim_length;
4751 
4752 	u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
4753 };
4754 
4755 /**
4756  * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4757  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4758  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4759  * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4760  *	receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4761  *
4762  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4763  * obtain the beacon template.
4764  *
4765  * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4766  * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
4767  * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4768  * applicable, the CSA count.
4769  *
4770  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4771  *
4772  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4773  */
4774 struct sk_buff *
4775 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4776 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4777 			      struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4778 
4779 /**
4780  * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4781  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4782  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4783  * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4784  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4785  * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4786  *	(including the ID and length bytes!).
4787  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4788  *
4789  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4790  * obtain the beacon frame.
4791  *
4792  * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4793  * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
4794  * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4795  * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
4796  *
4797  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4798  *
4799  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4800  */
4801 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4802 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4803 					 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4804 
4805 /**
4806  * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4807  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4808  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4809  *
4810  * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4811  *
4812  * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4813  */
4814 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4815 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4816 {
4817 	return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4818 }
4819 
4820 /**
4821  * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4822  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4823  *
4824  * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4825  * This function is called implicitly when
4826  * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4827  * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4828  * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4829  *
4830  * Return: new csa counter value
4831  */
4832 u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4833 
4834 /**
4835  * ieee80211_csa_set_counter - request mac80211 to set csa counter
4836  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4837  * @counter: the new value for the counter
4838  *
4839  * The csa counter can be changed by the device, this API should be
4840  * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
4841  *
4842  * It should never be used together with ieee80211_csa_update_counter(),
4843  * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
4844  */
4845 void ieee80211_csa_set_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
4846 
4847 /**
4848  * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4849  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4850  *
4851  * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
4852  * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
4853  * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4854  */
4855 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4856 
4857 /**
4858  * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
4859  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4860  *
4861  * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4862  */
4863 bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4864 
4865 
4866 /**
4867  * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4868  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4869  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4870  *
4871  * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4872  * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4873  *
4874  * Can only be called in AP mode.
4875  *
4876  * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
4877  */
4878 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4879 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4880 
4881 /**
4882  * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4883  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4884  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4885  *
4886  * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4887  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4888  * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4889  *
4890  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4891  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
4892  *
4893  * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
4894  */
4895 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4896 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4897 
4898 /**
4899  * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4900  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4901  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4902  * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
4903  *	if at all possible
4904  *
4905  * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4906  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4907  * BSSID and address is used.
4908  *
4909  * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
4910  * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
4911  *
4912  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4913  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
4914  *
4915  * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
4916  */
4917 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4918 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4919 				       bool qos_ok);
4920 
4921 /**
4922  * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4923  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4924  * @src_addr: source MAC address
4925  * @ssid: SSID buffer
4926  * @ssid_len: length of SSID
4927  * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
4928  *
4929  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4930  * hardware.
4931  *
4932  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
4933  */
4934 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4935 				       const u8 *src_addr,
4936 				       const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
4937 				       size_t tailroom);
4938 
4939 /**
4940  * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4941  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4942  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4943  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4944  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4945  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4946  * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4947  *
4948  * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4949  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4950  * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4951  * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4952  */
4953 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4954 		       const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4955 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4956 		       struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4957 
4958 /**
4959  * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4960  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4961  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4962  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4963  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4964  *
4965  * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4966  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4967  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4968  *
4969  * Return: The duration.
4970  */
4971 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4972 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
4973 			      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4974 
4975 /**
4976  * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4977  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4978  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4979  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4980  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4981  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4982  * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4983  *
4984  * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4985  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4986  * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4987  * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4988  */
4989 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4990 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4991 			     const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4992 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4993 			     struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4994 
4995 /**
4996  * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4997  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4998  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4999  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5000  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5001  *
5002  * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5003  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5004  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5005  *
5006  * Return: The duration.
5007  */
5008 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5009 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5010 				    size_t frame_len,
5011 				    const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5012 
5013 /**
5014  * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
5015  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5016  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5017  * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
5018  * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
5019  * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
5020  *
5021  * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
5022  * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
5023  *
5024  * Return: The duration.
5025  */
5026 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5027 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5028 					enum nl80211_band band,
5029 					size_t frame_len,
5030 					struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
5031 
5032 /**
5033  * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
5034  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5035  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5036  *
5037  * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
5038  * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
5039  * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
5040  * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
5041  * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
5042  *
5043  * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
5044  * frames are available.
5045  *
5046  * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
5047  * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
5048  * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
5049  * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
5050  * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
5051  * use common code for all beacons.
5052  */
5053 struct sk_buff *
5054 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5055 
5056 /**
5057  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
5058  *
5059  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
5060  *
5061  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5062  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5063  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5064  */
5065 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5066 			       u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5067 
5068 /**
5069  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
5070  *
5071  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
5072  * from the given packet.
5073  *
5074  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5075  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
5076  *	with this P1K
5077  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5078  */
5079 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5080 					  struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
5081 {
5082 	struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
5083 	const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
5084 	u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
5085 
5086 	ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
5087 }
5088 
5089 /**
5090  * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
5091  *
5092  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
5093  * and transmitter address.
5094  *
5095  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5096  * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
5097  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5098  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5099  */
5100 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5101 			       const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5102 
5103 /**
5104  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5105  *
5106  * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5107  * in the packet.
5108  *
5109  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5110  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5111  *	encrypted with this key
5112  * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5113  */
5114 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5115 			    struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5116 
5117 /**
5118  * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5119  *
5120  * @pos: start of crypto header
5121  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5122  * @pn: PN to add
5123  *
5124  * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5125  * the packet payload)
5126  *
5127  * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5128  * point to the crypto header)
5129  */
5130 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5131 
5132 /**
5133  * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5134  *
5135  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5136  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5137  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5138  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5139  * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5140  *
5141  * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5142  * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5143  * by the device and not by mac80211.
5144  *
5145  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5146  * can be done concurrently.
5147  */
5148 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5149 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5150 
5151 /**
5152  * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5153  *
5154  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5155  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5156  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5157  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5158  * @seq: new sequence data
5159  *
5160  * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5161  * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5162  * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5163  * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5164  *
5165  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5166  * can be done concurrently.
5167  */
5168 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5169 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5170 
5171 /**
5172  * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5173  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5174  *
5175  * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5176  * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5177  * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5178  *
5179  * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5180  * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5181  */
5182 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5183 
5184 /**
5185  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5186  * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5187  * @keyconf: new key data
5188  *
5189  * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5190  * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5191  * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5192  *
5193  * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5194  * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5195  * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5196  * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5197  *
5198  * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5199  * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5200  * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5201  * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5202  * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5203  * of the reconfiguration.
5204  *
5205  * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5206  * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5207  *
5208  * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5209  * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5210  * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5211  * the key that's being replaced.
5212  */
5213 struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5214 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5215 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5216 
5217 /**
5218  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5219  * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5220  * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5221  * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5222  * @gfp: allocation flags
5223  */
5224 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5225 				const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5226 
5227 /**
5228  * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5229  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5230  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5231  *
5232  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5233  */
5234 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5235 
5236 /**
5237  * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5238  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5239  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5240  *
5241  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5242  */
5243 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5244 
5245 /**
5246  * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5247  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5248  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5249  *
5250  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5251  *
5252  * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5253  */
5254 
5255 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5256 
5257 /**
5258  * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5259  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5260  *
5261  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5262  */
5263 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5264 
5265 /**
5266  * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5267  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5268  *
5269  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5270  */
5271 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5272 
5273 /**
5274  * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5275  *
5276  * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5277  * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5278  * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5279  * any context, including hardirq context.
5280  *
5281  * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5282  * @info: information about the completed scan
5283  */
5284 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5285 			      struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5286 
5287 /**
5288  * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5289  *
5290  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5291  * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5292  *
5293  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5294  */
5295 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5296 
5297 /**
5298  * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5299  *
5300  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5301  * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5302  * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5303  * while associating, for instance.
5304  *
5305  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5306  */
5307 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5308 
5309 /**
5310  * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5311  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5312  *	been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5313  *	reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5314  *	interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5315  *	haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5316  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5317  *	interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5318  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5319  */
5320 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5321 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL	= 0,
5322 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL	= BIT(0),
5323 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE	= BIT(1),
5324 };
5325 
5326 /**
5327  * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5328  *
5329  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5330  * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5331  * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5332  * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5333  *
5334  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5335  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5336  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5337  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5338  */
5339 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5340 				  void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5341 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5342 				  void *data);
5343 
5344 /**
5345  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5346  *
5347  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5348  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5349  * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5350  * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5351  * be used.
5352  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5353  *
5354  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5355  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5356  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5357  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5358  */
5359 static inline void
5360 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5361 				    void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5362 						     struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5363 				    void *data)
5364 {
5365 	ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5366 				     iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5367 				     iterator, data);
5368 }
5369 
5370 /**
5371  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5372  *
5373  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5374  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5375  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5376  * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5377  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5378  *
5379  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5380  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5381  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5382  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5383  */
5384 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5385 						u32 iter_flags,
5386 						void (*iterator)(void *data,
5387 						    u8 *mac,
5388 						    struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5389 						void *data);
5390 
5391 /**
5392  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
5393  *
5394  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5395  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5396  * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
5397  *
5398  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5399  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5400  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5401  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5402  */
5403 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5404 					      u32 iter_flags,
5405 					      void (*iterator)(void *data,
5406 						u8 *mac,
5407 						struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5408 					      void *data);
5409 
5410 /**
5411  * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5412  *
5413  * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5414  * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5415  * function for them.
5416  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5417  *
5418  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5419  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5420  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5421  */
5422 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5423 				       void (*iterator)(void *data,
5424 						struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5425 				       void *data);
5426 /**
5427  * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5428  *
5429  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5430  * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5431  *
5432  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5433  * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5434  */
5435 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5436 
5437 /**
5438  * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5439  *
5440  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5441  * workqueue.
5442  *
5443  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5444  * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5445  * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5446  */
5447 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5448 				  struct delayed_work *dwork,
5449 				  unsigned long delay);
5450 
5451 /**
5452  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5453  * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5454  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5455  * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5456  *
5457  * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5458  *
5459  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5460  * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5461  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5462  */
5463 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5464 				  u16 timeout);
5465 
5466 /**
5467  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5468  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5469  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5470  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5471  *
5472  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5473  * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5474  * from any context.
5475  */
5476 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5477 				      u16 tid);
5478 
5479 /**
5480  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5481  * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5482  * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5483  *
5484  * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5485  *
5486  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5487  * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5488  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5489  */
5490 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5491 
5492 /**
5493  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5494  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5495  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5496  * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5497  *
5498  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5499  * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5500  * can be called from any context.
5501  */
5502 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5503 				     u16 tid);
5504 
5505 /**
5506  * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5507  *
5508  * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5509  * @addr: station's address
5510  *
5511  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5512  *
5513  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5514  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5515  */
5516 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5517 					 const u8 *addr);
5518 
5519 /**
5520  * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
5521  *
5522  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5523  * @addr: remote station's address
5524  * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
5525  *
5526  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5527  *
5528  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5529  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5530  *
5531  * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5532  *      the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5533  *      We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5534  *      logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5535  *      BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5536  *      In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5537  *      is not reliable.
5538  *
5539  * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
5540  */
5541 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5542 					       const u8 *addr,
5543 					       const u8 *localaddr);
5544 
5545 /**
5546  * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5547  * @hw: the hardware
5548  * @pubsta: the station
5549  * @block: whether to block or unblock
5550  *
5551  * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5552  * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5553  * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5554  * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5555  * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5556  *
5557  * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5558  * manner.
5559  *
5560  * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5561  * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5562  * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5563  * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5564  * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5565  * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5566  * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5567  * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5568  * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5569  * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5570  * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5571  * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5572  * woke up while blocked or not.
5573  */
5574 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5575 			       struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5576 
5577 /**
5578  * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5579  * @pubsta: the station
5580  *
5581  * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5582  * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5583  * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5584  * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5585  *
5586  * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5587  * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5588  * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5589  * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5590  *
5591  * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5592  *     driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5593  *     you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5594  *     and restore the _irqsafe version!
5595  */
5596 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
5597 
5598 /**
5599  * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5600  * @pubsta: the station
5601  * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5602  *
5603  * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5604  * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5605  * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5606  * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5607  * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5608  * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5609  * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5610  * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5611  * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5612  * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5613  * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5614  * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5615  * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5616  * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5617  */
5618 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5619 
5620 /**
5621  * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
5622  *
5623  * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver can call
5624  * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
5625  * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
5626  * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
5627  *
5628  * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
5629  * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
5630  * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
5631  * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
5632  * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
5633  * attempts.
5634  *
5635  * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
5636  * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
5637  * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
5638  * them to 0.
5639  *
5640  * @pubsta: the station
5641  * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
5642  * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
5643  * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
5644  */
5645 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5646 				    u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
5647 
5648 /**
5649  * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device
5650  *
5651  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5652  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5653  *
5654  * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can
5655  * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false.
5656  */
5657 bool
5658 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
5659 
5660 /**
5661  * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5662  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5663  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5664  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5665  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5666  *
5667  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5668  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5669  * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5670  * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5671  * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5672  * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
5673  *
5674  * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5675  * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5676  * set_key callback.
5677  */
5678 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5679 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5680 			 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5681 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5682 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5683 				      struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5684 				      void *data),
5685 			 void *iter_data);
5686 
5687 /**
5688  * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5689  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5690  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5691  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5692  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5693  *
5694  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5695  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5696  * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5697  * in removal process will be skipped.
5698  *
5699  * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5700  * and thus iter must be atomic.
5701  */
5702 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5703 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5704 			     void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5705 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5706 					  struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5707 					  struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5708 					  void *data),
5709 			     void *iter_data);
5710 
5711 /**
5712  * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5713  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5714  * @iter: iterator function
5715  * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5716  *
5717  * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5718  * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5719  * places while calling into the driver.
5720  *
5721  * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5722  * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5723  * removed.
5724  *
5725  * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5726  * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5727  * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5728  * or not.
5729  */
5730 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5731 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5732 	void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5733 		     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5734 		     void *data),
5735 	void *iter_data);
5736 
5737 /**
5738  * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5739  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5740  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5741  *
5742  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5743  * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5744  * information. This function must only be called from within the
5745  * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5746  * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
5747  * %NULL.
5748  *
5749  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5750  */
5751 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5752 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5753 
5754 /**
5755  * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5756  *
5757  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5758  *
5759  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
5760  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
5761  * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5762  */
5763 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5764 
5765 /**
5766  * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5767  *
5768  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5769  *
5770  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
5771  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5772  * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
5773  * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5774  * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
5775  *
5776  * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5777  * without connection recovery attempts.
5778  */
5779 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5780 
5781 /**
5782  * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5783  *
5784  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5785  *
5786  * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5787  * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5788  * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5789  * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5790  * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5791  *
5792  * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5793  * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5794  * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5795  * disconnect normally later.
5796  *
5797  * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5798  * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5799  * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5800  * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5801  */
5802 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5803 
5804 /**
5805  * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5806  *	rssi threshold triggered
5807  *
5808  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5809  * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5810  * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
5811  * @gfp: context flags
5812  *
5813  * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
5814  * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5815  * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5816  */
5817 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5818 			       enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5819 			       s32 rssi_level,
5820 			       gfp_t gfp);
5821 
5822 /**
5823  * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5824  *
5825  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5826  * @gfp: context flags
5827  */
5828 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5829 
5830 /**
5831  * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5832  *
5833  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5834  */
5835 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5836 
5837 /**
5838  * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5839  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5840  * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5841  *
5842  * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5843  * and wake up the suspended queues.
5844  */
5845 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5846 
5847 /**
5848  * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5849  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5850  * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
5851  *
5852  * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5853  * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5854  * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5855  */
5856 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5857 			    enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5858 
5859 /**
5860  * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5861  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5862  */
5863 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5864 
5865 /**
5866  * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5867  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5868  */
5869 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5870 
5871 /**
5872  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5873  *
5874  * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5875  * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5876  * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5877  * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5878  * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5879  * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5880  *
5881  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5882  * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5883  * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5884  */
5885 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5886 				  const u8 *addr);
5887 
5888 /**
5889  * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5890  * @pubsta: station struct
5891  * @tid: the session's TID
5892  * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5893  *	assumed to be out of the window after the call
5894  * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5895  * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5896  *
5897  * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5898  * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5899  * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5900  * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5901  */
5902 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5903 					  u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5904 					  u16 received_mpdus);
5905 
5906 /**
5907  * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5908  *
5909  * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5910  * buffer.
5911  *
5912  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5913  * @ra: the peer's destination address
5914  * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5915  * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5916  */
5917 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5918 
5919 /**
5920  * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
5921  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5922  * @addr: station mac address
5923  * @tid: the rx tid
5924  */
5925 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
5926 				 unsigned int tid);
5927 
5928 /**
5929  * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5930  *
5931  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5932  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5933  * reordering.
5934  *
5935  * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5936  * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5937  *
5938  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5939  * @addr: station mac address
5940  * @tid: the rx tid
5941  */
5942 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5943 						      const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5944 {
5945 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5946 		return;
5947 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
5948 }
5949 
5950 /**
5951  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5952  *
5953  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5954  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5955  * reordering.
5956  *
5957  * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5958  * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5959  *
5960  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5961  * @addr: station mac address
5962  * @tid: the rx tid
5963  */
5964 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5965 						     const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5966 {
5967 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5968 		return;
5969 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
5970 }
5971 
5972 /**
5973  * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
5974  *
5975  * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
5976  * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
5977  *
5978  * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
5979  *
5980  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5981  * @addr: station mac address
5982  * @tid: the rx tid
5983  */
5984 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5985 				   const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
5986 
5987 /* Rate control API */
5988 
5989 /**
5990  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
5991  *
5992  * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5993  * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5994  * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
5995  * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5996  *	to be filled in
5997  * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5998  *	which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5999  *	used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
6000  * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
6001  *	RTS threshold
6002  * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
6003  *	if the selected rate supports it
6004  * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
6005  * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
6006  * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
6007  */
6008 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
6009 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
6010 	struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
6011 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
6012 	struct sk_buff *skb;
6013 	struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
6014 	bool rts, short_preamble;
6015 	u32 rate_idx_mask;
6016 	u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
6017 	bool bss;
6018 };
6019 
6020 /**
6021  * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
6022  */
6023 enum rate_control_capabilities {
6024 	/**
6025 	 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
6026 	 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
6027 	 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
6028 	 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
6029 	 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
6030 	 */
6031 	RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
6032 };
6033 
6034 struct rate_control_ops {
6035 	unsigned long capa;
6036 	const char *name;
6037 	void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6038 	void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv,
6039 			    struct dentry *debugfsdir);
6040 	void (*free)(void *priv);
6041 
6042 	void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
6043 	void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6044 			  struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6045 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
6046 	void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6047 			    struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6048 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6049 			    u32 changed);
6050 	void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6051 			 void *priv_sta);
6052 
6053 	void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
6054 			      struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6055 			      void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
6056 	void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6057 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6058 			  struct sk_buff *skb);
6059 	void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6060 			 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
6061 
6062 	void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
6063 				struct dentry *dir);
6064 
6065 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
6066 };
6067 
6068 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6069 				 enum nl80211_band band,
6070 				 int index)
6071 {
6072 	return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
6073 }
6074 
6075 static inline s8
6076 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6077 		  struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6078 {
6079 	int i;
6080 
6081 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6082 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6083 			return i;
6084 
6085 	/* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
6086 	WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
6087 
6088 	/* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
6089 	return 0;
6090 }
6091 
6092 static inline
6093 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6094 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6095 {
6096 	unsigned int i;
6097 
6098 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6099 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6100 			return true;
6101 	return false;
6102 }
6103 
6104 /**
6105  * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
6106  *
6107  * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
6108  * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
6109  * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
6110  * the most recent rate control module decision.
6111  *
6112  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6113  * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6114  * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6115  */
6116 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6117 			   struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6118 			   struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6119 
6120 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6121 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6122 
6123 static inline bool
6124 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6125 {
6126 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6127 }
6128 
6129 static inline bool
6130 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6131 {
6132 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6133 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6134 }
6135 
6136 static inline bool
6137 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6138 {
6139 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6140 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6141 }
6142 
6143 static inline bool
6144 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6145 {
6146 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6147 }
6148 
6149 static inline bool
6150 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6151 {
6152 	return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6153 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6154 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6155 }
6156 
6157 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6158 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6159 {
6160 	if (p2p) {
6161 		switch (type) {
6162 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6163 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6164 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6165 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6166 		default:
6167 			break;
6168 		}
6169 	}
6170 	return type;
6171 }
6172 
6173 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6174 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6175 {
6176 	return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6177 }
6178 
6179 /**
6180  * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6181  *
6182  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6183  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6184  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6185  *
6186  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6187  * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6188  * matching GroupId management frame.
6189  * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6190  */
6191 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6192 				const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6193 
6194 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6195 				   int rssi_min_thold,
6196 				   int rssi_max_thold);
6197 
6198 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6199 
6200 /**
6201  * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6202  *
6203  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6204  *
6205  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6206  *
6207  * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6208  * applicable.
6209  */
6210 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6211 
6212 /**
6213  * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6214  * @vif: virtual interface
6215  * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6216  * @gfp: allocation flags
6217  *
6218  * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6219  */
6220 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6221 				    struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6222 				    gfp_t gfp);
6223 
6224 /**
6225  * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6226  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6227  * @vif: virtual interface
6228  * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6229  * @band: the band to transmit on
6230  * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6231  *
6232  * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6233  */
6234 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6235 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6236 			      int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6237 
6238 /**
6239  * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6240  *
6241  * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6242  * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6243  *
6244  * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6245  *
6246  * private:
6247  *
6248  * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6249  * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6250  */
6251 struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6252 	u32 next_tsf;
6253 	bool has_next_tsf;
6254 
6255 	u8 absent;
6256 
6257 	u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6258 	struct {
6259 		u32 start;
6260 		u32 duration;
6261 		u32 interval;
6262 	} desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6263 };
6264 
6265 /**
6266  * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6267  *
6268  * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6269  * @data: NoA tracking data
6270  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6271  *
6272  * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6273  */
6274 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6275 			    struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6276 
6277 /**
6278  * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6279  *
6280  * @data: NoA tracking data
6281  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6282  */
6283 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6284 
6285 /**
6286  * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6287  * @vif: virtual interface
6288  * @peer: the peer's destination address
6289  * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6290  * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6291  * @gfp: allocation flags
6292  *
6293  * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6294  */
6295 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6296 				 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6297 				 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6298 
6299 /**
6300  * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6301  *
6302  * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6303  * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6304  * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6305  * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6306  * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6307  * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6308  *
6309  * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6310  * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6311  * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6312  *
6313  * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6314  * @tid: the TID to reserve
6315  *
6316  * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6317  */
6318 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6319 
6320 /**
6321  * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6322  *
6323  * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6324  * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6325  * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6326  *
6327  * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6328  * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6329  * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6330  *
6331  * @sta: the station
6332  * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6333  */
6334 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6335 
6336 /**
6337  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6338  *
6339  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6340  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6341  *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6342  *
6343  * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6344  *
6345  * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6346  * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6347  * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by by RCU and thus the
6348  * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6349  * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6350  * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6351  * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6352  *
6353  * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
6354  * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
6355  */
6356 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6357 				     struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6358 
6359 /**
6360  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6361  * (in process context)
6362  *
6363  * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
6364  * (internally disables bottom halves).
6365  *
6366  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6367  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6368  *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6369  */
6370 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6371 						      struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6372 {
6373 	struct sk_buff *skb;
6374 
6375 	local_bh_disable();
6376 	skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
6377 	local_bh_enable();
6378 
6379 	return skb;
6380 }
6381 
6382 /**
6383  * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6384  *
6385  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6386  * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6387  *
6388  * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6389  * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6390  * driver has finished scheduling it.
6391  */
6392 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6393 
6394 /**
6395  * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6396  *
6397  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6398  * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6399  *
6400  * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6401  * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6402  */
6403 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6404 
6405 /* (deprecated) */
6406 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
6407 {
6408 }
6409 
6410 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6411 			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force);
6412 
6413 /**
6414  * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
6415  *
6416  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6417  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6418  *
6419  * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
6420  * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
6421  *
6422  * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
6423  * this TXQ internally.
6424  */
6425 static inline void
6426 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6427 {
6428 	__ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true);
6429 }
6430 
6431 /**
6432  * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
6433  *
6434  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6435  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6436  * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
6437  *
6438  * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
6439  * internally.
6440  */
6441 static inline void
6442 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6443 		     bool force)
6444 {
6445 	__ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force);
6446 }
6447 
6448 /**
6449  * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
6450  *
6451  * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
6452  * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
6453  * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
6454  * next_txq().
6455  *
6456  * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
6457  * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
6458  * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
6459  * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
6460  * again.
6461  *
6462  * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
6463  * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
6464  * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
6465  * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
6466  * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
6467  * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
6468  *
6469  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6470  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6471  */
6472 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6473 				struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6474 
6475 /**
6476  * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
6477  *
6478  * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
6479  * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
6480  * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
6481  *
6482  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6483  * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
6484  * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
6485  */
6486 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6487 			     unsigned long *frame_cnt,
6488 			     unsigned long *byte_cnt);
6489 
6490 /**
6491  * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
6492  *
6493  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
6494  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6495  *
6496  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6497  * @inst_id: the local instance id
6498  * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
6499  * @gfp: allocation flags
6500  */
6501 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6502 				   u8 inst_id,
6503 				   enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
6504 				   gfp_t gfp);
6505 
6506 /**
6507  * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
6508  *
6509  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
6510  * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
6511  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6512  *
6513  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6514  * @match: match event information
6515  * @gfp: allocation flags
6516  */
6517 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6518 			      struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
6519 			      gfp_t gfp);
6520 
6521 /**
6522  * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX.
6523  *
6524  * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6525  * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length.
6526  *
6527  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6528  * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate
6529  *          information.
6530  * @len: frame length in bytes
6531  */
6532 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6533 			      struct ieee80211_rx_status *status,
6534 			      int len);
6535 
6536 /**
6537  * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX.
6538  *
6539  * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6540  * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length.
6541  *
6542  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6543  * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
6544  * @len: frame length in bytes
6545  */
6546 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6547 			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info,
6548 			      int len);
6549 /**
6550  * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading.
6551  *
6552  * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3
6553  * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the
6554  * hardware or firmware.
6555  *
6556  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6557  * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off
6558  */
6559 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable);
6560 
6561 #endif /* MAC80211_H */
6562